[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025214945A1 - Polymerizable liquid crystal formulations - Google Patents

Polymerizable liquid crystal formulations

Info

Publication number
WO2025214945A1
WO2025214945A1 PCT/EP2025/059440 EP2025059440W WO2025214945A1 WO 2025214945 A1 WO2025214945 A1 WO 2025214945A1 EP 2025059440 W EP2025059440 W EP 2025059440W WO 2025214945 A1 WO2025214945 A1 WO 2025214945A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
diyl
atoms
group
groups
compounds
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/EP2025/059440
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Oleksandra SHARGAIEVA
Thorsten SCHENK
Stephen Mulcahy
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Merck Patent GmbH
Original Assignee
Merck Patent GmbH
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Merck Patent GmbH filed Critical Merck Patent GmbH
Publication of WO2025214945A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025214945A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09KMATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K19/00Liquid crystal materials
    • C09K19/52Liquid crystal materials characterised by components which are not liquid crystals, e.g. additives with special physical aspect: solvents, solid particles
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09KMATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K19/00Liquid crystal materials
    • C09K19/04Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
    • C09K2019/0444Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit characterized by a linking chain between rings or ring systems, a bridging chain between extensive mesogenic moieties or an end chain group
    • C09K2019/0448Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit characterized by a linking chain between rings or ring systems, a bridging chain between extensive mesogenic moieties or an end chain group the end chain group being a polymerizable end group, e.g. -Sp-P or acrylate
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09KMATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K19/00Liquid crystal materials
    • C09K19/04Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
    • C09K19/06Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
    • C09K19/08Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
    • C09K19/10Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings
    • C09K19/14Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a carbon chain
    • C09K19/18Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a carbon chain the chain containing carbon-to-carbon triple bonds, e.g. tolans
    • C09K2019/188Ph-C≡C-Ph-C≡C-Ph
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09KMATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K19/00Liquid crystal materials
    • C09K19/52Liquid crystal materials characterised by components which are not liquid crystals, e.g. additives with special physical aspect: solvents, solid particles
    • C09K2019/525Solvents

Definitions

  • P24068 De - 1 - Polymerizable liquid crystal formulations 5 Field of the Invention T he invention relates to polymerizable liquid crystal formulations (as a subcategory of liquid crystal material), especially to polymerizable ink formulations for inkjet printing, which are preferably PFAS-free (for enabling the reduction of 10 perfluorocarbons and providing an environment friendly material), and which are comprising one or more polymerizable mesogenic compounds, also known as r eactive mesogens (RMs), and one or more organic solvents selected from the group of aromatic ester and aromatic or aliphatic diester solvents, to polymers and polymer films obtained from such formulations, and to the use of the formulations, 15 polymers and polymer films in optical or electrooptical components or devices, especially for digital optics or augmented reality or virtual reality (AR/VR) a pplications like polarizers, optical compensators, reflective films, diffraction or surface gratings, Bragg polarization gratings (
  • RMs Reactive mesogens
  • polymerizable liquid crystals combine the properties of liquid crystals and polymers.
  • RMs can be used for the preparation of functional films or coatings with adjustable refractive indices, polarization, and surface alignment. These materials can be applied to waveguides or optics in augmented reality (AR) 30 displays to enhance performance, image quality, field of view, and overall user experience.
  • AR augmented reality
  • the polymerized RMs can form thin films with high b irefringence that can be integrated into flexible, lightweight devices.
  • the quality of the RM layer is essential for the visual quality as well as device performance.
  • IJP Inkjet printing
  • solvent selection has a particular influence on the parameters of the formulation and P24068 De - 2 - often determines whether a formulation is suitable for use in inkjet printing.
  • additional requirements related to liquid crystal alignment 5 are also essential.
  • typical solvents proposed for use in RM formulations are selected from low boiling point ketones, alcohols, glycols, or their esters. Among aromatic compounds, toluene and xylene are also often mentioned. 10
  • the solvent selection has a particular influence on the parameters of the formulation and often determines whether a formulation is suitable for use in inkjet p rinting or not.
  • solvents that are suitable for inkjet printing have poor solubility of the solute or are not suitable for further processing conditions and vice 15 versa.
  • the solvents used in the formulation for depositing the second RM layer onto the first RM layer may cause damage to the first layer or allow migration of individual components of the second RM formulation into the first layer.
  • RM formulations which are especially suitable for use as printing inks, and which enable good solubility of the RMs and show further a dvantageous properties like good jettability, high jetting stability, long shelf life and good process compatibility for standard printing processes, especially inkjet printing, 30 which avoid damage to cured RM layers used as substrates, and which can also be used in large scale production. It is an aim of the present invention to provide RM formulations which show one or m ore of the above-mentioned advantages. Other aims of the present invention are 35 immediately evident to the person skilled in the art from the following detailed description.
  • RM formulation a formulation
  • RM polymerizable mesogenic compound
  • RM mixture a mixture of two or more polymerizable mesogenic compounds
  • the formulation comprises at least one first solvent selected from formulae S1 and S2 25
  • the individual radicals independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings Ar S1 aryl or heteroaryl with 5 or 6 ring atoms, which optionally contains one or t wo hetero atoms selected from N, O and S, preferably phenyl, and which is 35 optionally
  • RM formulation as described above and below, which further comprises one or more additives, preferably selected from the group consisting of polymerization initiators, surfactants, stabilisers, catalysts, sensitizers, inhibitors, chain-transfer agents, co-reacting monomers, reactive thinners, surface- 25 active compounds, lubricating agents, wetting agents, dispersing agents, hydrophobing agents, adhesive agents, flow improvers, degassing or defoaming agents, deaerators, diluents, reactive diluents, auxiliaries, colourants, dyes, pigments and nanoparticles.
  • additives preferably selected from the group consisting of polymerization initiators, surfactants, stabilisers, catalysts, sensitizers, inhibitors, chain-transfer agents, co-reacting monomers, reactive thinners, surface- 25 active compounds, lubricating agents, wetting agents, dispersing agents, hydrophobing agents, adhesive agents, flow improvers, degassing or defo
  • the invention further relates to a polymer or polymer film obtainable or obtained from an RM formulation as described above and below.
  • T he invention further relates to a process of preparing a polymer or polymer film from an RM formulation containing an RM or RM mixture and a solvent or solvent 35 blend as described above and below, comprising the steps of depositing a layer of the RM formulation onto a substrate, preferably removing the solvents, optionally a nnealing the layer, and polymerizing the RM or RM mixture, preferably at a temperature where it exhibits a liquid crystal phase, and wherein the RM formulation P24068 De - 5 - is preferably deposited onto the substrate by a printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing.
  • the invention further relates to the use of the RM formulation, polymer or polymer film as described above and below in optical, electrooptical or electronic components or devices.
  • the invention further relates to an optical, electrooptical or electronic device or a component comprising an RM formulation, polymer or polymer film as described above and below.
  • S aid components include, without limitation, optical retardation films like quarter 15 wave foils (QWF) or half wave foils (HWF), polarizers, optical compensators, reflective films, diffraction or surface gratings such as Bragg polarization gratings (Bragg PG), polarization volume gratings (PVG), polarization volume holograms ( PVH), Pancharatnam Berry (PB) gratings, furthermore nonmechanical beam steering elements, optical waveguides, optical couplers or combiners, polarization 20 beam splitters, partial mirrors, reflective films, alignment layers, colour filters, a ntistatic protection sheets, electromagnetic interference protection sheets, lenses for light guides, focusing and optical effects, polarization controlled lenses, PB lenses and IR reflection films; for example for use in LC displays (LCDs), organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs), autostereoscopic 3D displays, see-through near-eye 25 displays, augmented reality( AR) or virtual reality (VR) systems, switchable windows, spatial light
  • Said devices include, without limitation, electro optical displays, especially LCDs, OLEDs, autostereoscopic 3D displays, see-through near-eye displays, AR/VR s ystems, goggles for AR/VR applications, switchable windows, spatial light modulators, optical data storage devices, optical sensors, holographic devices, s pectrometers, optical telecommunication systems, polarimeters or front-/backlights.
  • electro optical displays especially LCDs, OLEDs, autostereoscopic 3D displays, see-through near-eye displays, AR/VR s ystems, goggles for AR/VR applications, switchable windows, spatial light modulators, optical data storage devices, optical sensors, holographic devices, s pectrometers, optical telecommunication systems, polarimeters or front-/backlights.
  • P24068 De - 6 - Fig.1a-c (x2 magnification) show stitched microscopic images between crossed polarizers of polymer films prepared from inkjet-
  • film as used herein includes rigid or flexible, self-supporting or free- standing films with mechanical stability, as well as coatings or layers on a supporting substrate or between two substrates.
  • reactive mesogen and “RM” will be understood to mean a compound containing a mesogenic or liquid crystalline skeleton, and one or more functional groups attached thereto, optionally via spacer groups, which are suitable for polymerization and are also referred to as “polymerizable group” or "P”.
  • P polymerizable group
  • Polymerizable compounds or RMs with one polymerizable group are also referred to as “monoreactive” compounds, polymerizable compounds or RMs with two 35 polymerizable groups as “direactive” compounds, and polymerizable compounds or RMs with more than two polymerizable groups as “multireactive” compounds.
  • Compounds without a polymerizable group are also referred to as “non-reactive” compounds.
  • the terms "liquid crystal”, “mesogen” and “mesogenic compound” as used herein 5 mean a compound that under suitable conditions of temperature, pressure and concentration can exist as a mesophase or in particular as a LC phase.
  • the term “clearing point” means the temperature at which the transition between the mesophase with the highest temperature range and the isotropic phase occurs. 10
  • the term "mesogenic group” as used herein is known to the person skilled in the art and described in the literature, and means a group which, due to the anisotropy of its attracting and repelling interactions, essentially contributes to causing a liquid- crystal (LC) phase in low-molecular-weight or polymeric substances.
  • Compounds 15 containing mesogenic groups do not necessarily have to have an LC phase themselves. It is also possible for mesogenic compounds to e xhibit LC phase behaviour only after mixing with other compounds and/or after polymerization.
  • Typical mesogenic groups are, for example, rigid rod- or disc- shaped units.
  • spacer group or “spacer” mean a flexible group, for example an alkylene group, which connects the mesogenic group and the polymerizable group(s) in a polymerizable mesogenic compound.
  • RM formulation means a formulation comprising at least one RM or an RM mixture, and further comprising one or more solvents, preferably selected from organic solvents, as described above and below.
  • RM mixture means a mixture comprising one or more, preferably two or more, more preferably two to ten, very preferably two to six RMs,
  • the RM mixture optionally further comprises one or more solid additives including, without P24068 De - 8 - being limited to, polymerization initiators, inhibitors, surfactants and adhesion promoters, etc. as described in more detail below. 5
  • the percentage of a compound in an RM mixture as given a bove and below means % by weight of all solids in the RM mixture.
  • the percentage of a compound in an RM formulation as given 10 above and below means % by weight of all solids in the RM formulation, including liquid additives as described below but excluding solvents.
  • T he Hansen Solubility Parameters (HSP) (see Hansen Solubility Parameters: A User’s Handbook, Second Edition, C. M. Hansen (2007), Taylor and Francis Group, LLC 15 (HSPiP manual) can be used for making a rough estimate if and to what amount a material (the solute) can be dissolved in another material (the solvent) to form a h omogeneous solution.
  • each molecule is defined by the following three HSPs [in MPa0.5], as also used herein: 20 ⁇ D refers to the energy from dispersion (non-polar) forces between molecules ⁇ P refers to the energy from dipolar intermolecular forces between molecules ⁇ H refers to the energy from hydrogen bonds between molecules
  • 20 ⁇ D refers to the energy from dispersion (non-polar) forces between molecules
  • ⁇ P refers to the energy from dipolar intermolecular forces between molecules
  • ⁇ H refers to the energy from hydrogen bonds between molecules
  • HSPiP Hansen Solubility 25 Parameters in Practice
  • per- and/or polyfluoroalkyl substance as used herein (following the definition by the OECD) means a substance or compound that contains at least 30 one fully fluorinated methyl or methylene C atom (without any H/Cl/Br/I atom attached to it), i.e., a compound with at least one CF3 or CF2 group.
  • polyfluorinated alkyl or aryl group as used herein means an alkyl or aryl group which is substituted by two or more F atoms (wherein the F atoms may 35 be attached either to the same or different C atoms), thus including perfluorocarbon groups.
  • polymer will be understood to mean a molecule that encompasses a backbone of one or more distinct types of repeating units (the 5 smallest constitutional unit of the molecule) and is inclusive of the commonly known terms “oligomer”, “copolymer”, “homopolymer” and the like. Further, it will be understood that the term polymer is inclusive of, in addition to the polymer itself, residues from initiators, catalysts, and other elements attendant to the synthesis of such a polymer, where such residues are understood as not being covalently 10 incorporated thereto.
  • polymerization means the chemical process to form a polymer by bonding together multiple polymerizable groups or polymer precursors (polymerizable compounds) containing such polymerizable groups.
  • a “polymer network” is a network in which all polymer chains are interconnected to 20 form a single macroscopic entity by many crosslinks.
  • the polymer network can occur in the following types: - A graft polymer molecule is a branched polymer molecule in which one or more the side chains are different, structurally or configurationally, from the main 25 chain. - A star polymer molecule is a branched polymer molecule in which a single branch point gives rise to multiple linear chains or arms. If the arms are identical, the star polymer molecule is said to be regular. If adjacent arms are composed of different repeating subunits, the star polymer molecule is said to 30 be variegated. - A comb polymer molecule consists of a main chain with two or more three-way branch points and linear side chains. If the arms are identical the comb polymer molecule is said to be regular.
  • a brush polymer molecule consists of a main chain with linear, unbranched side 35 chains and where one or more of the branch points has four-way functionality or larger.
  • P24068 De - 10 The term “chiral” in general is used to describe an object that is non-superimposable on its mirror image. 5 “ Achiral” (non- chiral) objects are objects that are identical to their mirror image. The terms “chiral nematic” and “cholesteric” are used synonymously in this application, unless explicitly stated otherwise. 10
  • the term “isomerizable / photoisomerizable compound” means a compound comprising one or more isomerizable or photoisomerizable groups, respectively.
  • the term “isomerizable group” means a functional group of a molecule that causes a 15 change of the geometry of the molecule, i.e. isomerization, either by bond rotation, s keletal rearrangement or atom- or group- transfer, or by dimerization, which can be induced, e.g., thermally or photochemically or by adding a catalyst.
  • the term “photoisomerizable group” means a functional group of a molecule that 20 causes a change of the geometry of the molecule, i.e.
  • photoisomerization either by bond r otation, skeletal rearrangement or atom- or group- transfer, or by dimerization, upon irradiation with light of a suitable wavelength that can be absorbed by the molecule (photoisomerization).
  • a chiral RM formulation in accordance with the present invention can be prepared, for example, by doping a host mixture comprising one or more RMs with a chiral 35 compound having a high twisting power.
  • a low value of the pitch is hereinafter also referred to as “short pitch”, and a high value of the pitch is hereinafter also referred to as “long pitch”.
  • a short pitch 10 corresponds to a highly twisted structure, i.e., a higher twist angle
  • a long pitch corresponds to a slowly twisted structure, i.e., a lower twist angle, around the helix axis within a given distance.
  • T he twist angle, ⁇ through a thickness, d is defined by the following equation: 15 (360 ⁇ ⁇ ) where p is the pitch as defined above.
  • HTPtotal ⁇ i ci HTPi 25 wherein ci is the concentration of each individual chiral compound and HTPi is the helical twisting power of each individual chiral compound.
  • I HTP ⁇ I ( ⁇ s cs HTPs) – (( ⁇ rcr HTPr) wherein cs is the concentration of each individual chiral compound with S configuration, HTPs is the helical twisting power of each individual chiral compound 35 having S configuration and wherein cr is the concentration of each individual chiral compound with R configuration and HTPR is the helical twisting power of each individual chiral compound having R configuration.
  • visible light means electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength in a range from about 400 nm to about 740 nm.
  • UV light means electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength in a range from about 200 nm to about 450 nm.
  • linearly polarised light means light, which is at least partially linearly polarized.
  • the aligning light is linearly polarized with a degree of polarization of more than 5:1.
  • Wavelengths, intensity and energy of the linearly polarised light are chosen depending on the photosensitivity of the photoalignable material.
  • the wavelengths are in the UV-A, UV-B 35 and/or UV-C range or in the visible range.
  • the linearly polarised light comprises light of wavelengths less than 450 nm, more preferably less than 420 nm at the same time the linearly polarised light preferably comprises light of P24068 De - 13 - wavelengths longer than 280nm, preferably more than 320nm, more preferably over 350nm.
  • "Polarisability” means the ease with which the electron distribution in the atom or molecule can be distorted.
  • the polarizability increases with greater number of electrons and a more diffuse electron cloud.
  • the 20 polarizability can be calculated using a method described in e.g. Jap. J. Appl. Phys. 42, (2003) p.3463.
  • the optical retardation R represents the difference in the optical path lengths in 30 nanometres travelled by S-polarised and P-polarised light whilst passing through the birefringent material.
  • "On-axis" retardation means the retardation at normal incidence to the sample surface.
  • the retardation (R( ⁇ )) of a material can be measured using a spectroscopic 35 ellipsometer, for example the M2000 spectroscopic ellipsometer manufactured by J. A. Woollam Co.
  • This instrument can measure the optical retardance in nanometres of a birefringent sample e.g., Quartz over a range of wavelengths typically, 370nm to P24068 De - 14 - 2000nm. From this data it is possible to calculate the dispersion (R(450)/R(550) or ⁇ n(450)/ ⁇ n(550)) of a material. 5 A method for carrying out these measurements was presented at the National Physics Laboratory (London, UK) by N.
  • director is known in prior art and means the preferred orientation direction of the long molecular axes (in case of calamitic compounds) or short molecular axes (in case of discotic compounds) of the liquid-crystalline or RM molecules. In case of uniaxial ordering of such anisotropic molecules, the director is 20 the axis of anisotropy.
  • alignment or “orientation” relates to alignment (orientational ordering) of anisotropic units of material such as small molecules or fragments of big molecules in a common direction named “alignment direction”.
  • the liquid-crystalline director coincides with the alignment direction so that the alignment direction corresponds to the direction of the anisotropy axis of the material.
  • the terms "homeotropic structure / alignment / orientation” refer to a film wherein the optical axis is substantially perpendicular to the film plane.
  • the terms "planar structure /alignment / orientation” refer to a film wherein the optical axis is substantially parallel to the film plane. 5 All temperatures, such as, for example, the melting point T(C,N) or T(C,S), the transition from the smectic (S) to the nematic (N) phase T(S,N) and the clearing point T(N,I) of the liquid crystals, are quoted in degrees Celsius. All temperature d ifferences are quoted in differential degrees. 10 In case of doubt the definitions as given in C. Tschierske, G.
  • R including any variations thereof such as R 1 , R 0 , R 00 , R* 0 , R 11 , R 22 , R C , R 3 , R 4 etc., or L denotes an alkyl radical 25 and/or an alkoxy radical, this may be straight-chain or branched.
  • R including any variations thereof such as R 1 , R 0 , R 00 , R 0* , R 11 , R 22 , R C , R 3 , R 4 etc., or L denotes an alkyl radical wherein one or more CH2 groups are replaced by S, this may be straight-chain or 35 branched. It is preferably straight-chain, has 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 C atoms and accordingly preferably denotes thiomethyl, thioethyl, thiopropyl, thiobutyl, thiopentyl, thiohexyl or thioheptyl.
  • R including any variations thereof such as R 1 , R 0 , R 00 , R* 0 , R 11 , R 22 , R C , R 3 , R 4 etc., or L denotes an alkoxy or oxaalkyl 10 group it may also contain one or more additional oxygen atoms, provided that oxygen atoms are not linked directly to one another.
  • one or more of R including any variations thereof such as R 1 , R 0 , R 00 , R* 0 , R 11 , R 22 , R C , R 3 , R 4 etc., or L are selected from the group 15 consisting of , , 20 , -S , , , H , C1-12-alkyl or C2-12-alkenyl, and very preferably are selected from the group consisting of 25 30 , 35 , , .
  • P24068 De - 17 - -OCH2OCH3, -O(CH2)2OCH3, -O(CH2)3OCH3, -O(CH2)4OCH3, -O(CH2)2F, -O(CH2)3F and -O(CH2)4F.
  • it 10 denotes, in particular, vinyl, prop-1- or -2-enyl, but-1-, -2- or -3-enyl, pent-1-, -2-, -3- or -4-enyl, hex-1-, -2-, -3-, -4- or -5-enyl, hept-1-, -2-, -3-, -4-, -5- or - 6-enyl, oct-1-, -2-, -3-, -4-, -5-, -6- or -7-enyl, non-1-, -2-, -3-, -4-, -5-, -6-, -7- or -8- enyl, dec-1-, -2-, -3-, -4-, -5-, -6-, -7-, -8- or -9-enyl.
  • R including any variations thereof such as R 1 , R 0 , R 00 , R* 0 , R 11 , R 22 , R C , R 3 , R 4 etc., or L denotes an alkyl or alkenyl radical which is at least monosubstituted by halogen, this radical is preferably straight-chain, and halogen is preferably F or Cl. In the case of polysubstitution, halogen is preferably F.
  • the resultant radicals also include perfluorinated radicals.
  • the fluorine or chlorine substituent may be in any desired position, but is preferably in the ⁇ -position.
  • Halogen is preferably F or Cl, very preferably F.
  • substituents L are, for example, F, Cl, CN, NO2, CH3, C2H5, OCH3, SCH3, OC2H5, SC2H5, COCH3, COC2H5, COOCH3, COOC2H5, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, OC2F5, furthermore phenyl.
  • aryl and heteroaryl groups encompass 25 groups, which can be monocyclic or polycyclic, i.e.
  • Heteroaryl groups contain one or more h eteroatoms, preferably selected from O, N, S and Se. Particular preference is given 30 to mono-, bi- or tricyclic aryl groups having 6 to 25 C atoms and mono-, bi- or tricyclic heteroaryl groups having 2 to 25 C atoms, which optionally contain fused rings, and which are optionally substituted.
  • Preferred aryl groups are, for example, p henyl, biphenyl, terphenyl, [1,1':3',1''] ⁇ terphenyl-2'-yl, naphthyl, anthracene, binaphthyl, phenanthrene, pyrene, dihydropyrene, chrysene, perylene, tetracene, pentacene, benzopyrene, fluorene, indene, indenofluorene, spirobifluorene, more P24068 De - 19 - preferably 1,4-phenylene, 4,4’-biphenylene, 1, 4-terphenylene.
  • 5 Preferred heteroaryl groups are, for example, 5 membered rings, such as pyrrole, pyrazole, imidazole, 1,2,3-triazole, 1,2,4-triazole, tetrazole, furan, thiophene, selenophene, oxazole, isoxazole, 1,2 thiazole, 1,3-thiazole, 1,2,3-oxadiazole, 1,2,4 oxadiazole, 1,2,5-oxadiazole, 1,3,4-oxadiazole, 1,2,3-thiadiazole, 1,2,4-thiadiazole, 1,2,5-thiadiazole, 1,3,4-thiadiazole, 6 membered rings, such as pyridine, pyridazine, 10 pyrimidine, pyrazine, 1,3,5-triazine, 1,2,4-triazine, 1,2,3-triazine, 1,2,4,5-tetrazine, 1,2,3,4-tetraz
  • the heteroaryl groups may also be substituted by alkyl, alkoxy, thioalkyl, fluorine, fluoroalkyl or further aryl or heteroaryl groups.
  • 25 I n a g oup the single bond shown between the two ring atoms can be attached to any free position of the benzene ring.
  • he polymerizable group P is a group which is suitable for a polymerization reaction, such as, for example, free- radical or ionic chain polymerization, polyaddition or polycondensation, or for a polymer-analogous reaction, for example addition or condensation onto a main 35 polymer chain.
  • a polymerization reaction such as, for example, free- radical or ionic chain polymerization, polyaddition or polycondensation, or for a polymer-analogous reaction, for example addition or condensation onto a main 35 polymer chain.
  • a polymerizable compound as d in a polymerizable compound as d isclosed above and below, including compounds of formula D, M, T, A, I* and their subformulae, all polymerizable groups have the same meaning, and preferably denote acrylate or methacrylate, very preferably acrylate.
  • T he spacer group including any variations thereof such as Sp0, Sp1, Sp2, Sp*0, when being different from a single bond, is preferably of the formula Sp"-X", so that t he respective radical P-Sp- etc.
  • S p denotes linear or branched alkylene having 1 to 20, preferably 1 to 12, C atoms, which is optionally mono- or polysubstituted by F, Cl, Br, I or CN and in which, in addition, one or more non-adjacent CH2 groups may each be replaced, independently of one another, by -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N(R 0 )-, -Si(R 0 R 00 )-, P24068 De - 22 - -CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -S-CO-, -CO-S-, -N(R 00 )-CO-O-, -O-CO- N n such a way that O and/or S 5 at y , X " denotes -O-, -S-, -CO-,
  • X" is preferably -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -O-COO-, -CO-NR 0 -, -NR 0 - C O-, -NR0-CO-NR00- or a single bond.
  • Typical spacer groups Sp including any variations thereof such as Sp0, Sp1, Sp2, Sp*0, and -Sp"-X"- are, for example, -(CH2)p1-, -(CH2)p1-O-, -(CH2)p1-O-CO-, -(CH2)p1-CO-O-, - (CH2)p1-O-CO-O-, -(CH2CH2O)q1-CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2-S-CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2-NH- C H2CH2- or -(SiR0R00-O)p1-, in which p1 is an integer from 1 to 12, q1 is an integer from 1 to 3, and R 0 and R 00 have the meanings indicated above.
  • P articularly preferred groups Sp including any variations thereof such as Sp0, Sp1, Sp2, Sp*0, and -Sp"-X"- are -(CH2)p1-, -(CH2)p1-O-, -(CH2)p1-O-CO-, -(CH2)p1-CO-O-, -(CH2)p1- O-CO-O-, in which p1 and q1 have the meanings indicated above.
  • Particularly preferred groups Sp are, in each case straight-chain, ethylene, propylene, butylene, pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, octylene, nonylene, decylene, undecylene, dodecylene, octadecylene, ethyleneoxyethylene, methyleneoxybutylene, ethylenethioethylene, ethylene-N-methyliminoethylene, 1-methylalkylene, ethenylene, propenylene and butenylene.
  • the polymerizable compounds as d isclosed above and below, including compounds of formulae D, M, T, A, I* and their subformulae, contain a spacer group Sp, including any variations thereof such P24068 De - 23 - as Sp 0 , Sp 1 , Sp 2 , Sp* 0 , that is substituted by one or more polymerizable groups P, so that the group Sp-P etc. corresponds to Sp(P)s, with s being ⁇ 2 (branched 5 polymerizable groups).
  • Preferred polymerizable compounds according to this preferred embodiment are those wherein s is 2, i.e., compounds which contain a group Sp(P)2.
  • Very preferred p olymerizable compounds according to this preferred embodiment contain a group 10 selected from the following formulae: - X-alkyl-CHPP Sp1 -X-alkyl-CH((CH2)aaP)((CH2)bbP) Sp2 15 - X-N((CH2)aaP)((CH2)bbP) Sp3 -X-alkyl-CHP-CH2-CH2P Sp4 20 -X-alkyl-C(CH2P)(CH2P)-CaaH2aa+1 Sp5 - X-alkyl-CHP-CH2P Sp6 -X-alkyl-CPP-CaaH2aa+1 Sp7 25 -X-alkyl-CHPCHP-CaaH2aa+1 Sp8 in which P is as defined above, 30 alkyl denotes a single bond or straight-chain or branched alkylene having 1 to 12 C atoms which is unsubstituted or mono- or poly
  • Preferred groups Sp(P)2 are selected from formulae Sp1, Sp2 and Sp3.
  • Very preferred groups Sp(P)2 are selected from the following subformulae: 10 - CHPP Sp1a -O-CHPP Sp1b 15 -CH2-CHPP Sp1c -OCH2-CHPP Sp1d -CH(CH2-P)(CH2-P) Sp2a 20 - OCH(CH2-P)(CH2-P) Sp2b -CH2-CH(CH2-P)(CH2-P) Sp2c 25 -OCH2-CH(CH2-P)(CH2-P) Sp2d -CO-NH((CH2)2P)((CH2)2P) Sp3a
  • Detailed Description 30 T he RM formulations according to the present invention contain solvents or solvent blends as described above and below which, in combination with the RMs as described above and below, enable an RM formulation that shows advantageous p roperties like good solubility, good jetting properties, high stability, suitable 35 processing window and good process compatibility,
  • the RM formulations are also suitable for other printing or coating methods, as will be further specified below. 5 I n particular, the RM formulations according to the present invention enable to meet one or more of the following requirements, which are important for a good inkjet printing process: - the solubility of the RMs is at 15-30 wt% of solids, and is soluble at max.
  • the RM formulation is stable at room temperature over several days, - the RM formulation is jettable with a viscosity at least above 3.5 cP (at 20°C), - the solvent or solvent blend has a boiling temperature Tb ⁇ 180°C, - the solvent or solvent blend is removable at processing conditions, preferably at max.100°C during max.5 min, to allow for the alignment of RM, 15 - the solvent or solvent blend does not damage the photoalignment layer or another layer, for example another RM layer, underneath, onto which the RM formulation is deposited.
  • T he RM formulation according to the present invention preferably consists of a 20 solvent component, which contains a solvent or solvent blend of two or more solvents, at least one of which is selected from formulae S1 and S2, and an RM c omponent, which comprises an RM or RM mixture and optionally one or more additives.
  • all solvents in the RM formulation are selected from organic solvents.
  • the solvents of formula S1, ArS1 is preferably selected from phenyl, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, pyridine, pyran or 2,2-, 2,4- or 2,6-thiopyran, very preferably from phenyl, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L S .
  • the solvents of formula S2 ArS2 is preferably selected from 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4- phenylene, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, pyridine, pyran or 2,2-, 2,4- or 2,6-thiopyran, very preferably from 1,2-phenylene, 1,3-phenylene and 1,4-phenylene, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L S .
  • the solvents of formula S2 preferably ZS2 is -O-CO- and ZS2 is -CO-O, or ZS2 is - O-CO- and ZS3 is -CO-O-.
  • L S is preferably selected from, alkyl, alkoxy or alkyl carbonyl with 1 to 5 C atoms.
  • R S1 is preferably selected from methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl, very preferably from methyl and ethyl.
  • R S2 and R S3 are preferably selected from methyl, ethyl, 10 propyl and butyl, very preferably from methyl and ethyl. Further preferably R S2 and R S3 have the same meaning.
  • P referred solvents of formula S1 and S2 are selected from the following subformulae: 15 20 25 30 35 P24068 De - 27 - 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 wherein RS1, RS2, RS3 and b have the meanings given in formulae S1 and S2 or one of the preferred meanings given above and below, RS1 is preferably methyl or ethyl, RS2 and RS3 are preferably methyl or ethyl, and b is preferably 4.
  • P24068 De - 28 - Very preferred are solvents selected from subformulae S1-1, S1-2, S1-3, S1-4, S2- 1, and S2-5.
  • R S2 and R S3 in formula S2 and its subformulae have the same meaning.
  • the first solvent is selected from methyl benzoate, ethyl benzoate, m ethyl phenylacetate, butyl benzoate, benzyl propionate, phenyl proprionate, 10 dimethyl phthalate and diethyl adipate, most preferably from methyl benzoate, methyl phenylacetate and ethyl benzoate.
  • the first solvent, or the solvent blend, as used in the RM formulation according to the present invention has a boiling point ⁇ 180°C, very preferably from 15 190°C to 300°C, most preferably from 195°C to 260°C.
  • F urther preferably the first solvent, or the solvent blend, as used in the RM formulation according to the present invention has the following Hansen Solubility Parameters (in MPa0.5): 20 ⁇ D from 15 to 20, preferably from 17 to 19.5, very preferably from 17.5 to 18.5, ⁇ P from 5 to 12, preferably from 5.5 to 11, very preferably from 6.5 to 10.5, ⁇ H from 4 to 8, preferably from 4.5 to 7, very preferably from 5 to 6.5.
  • the RM formulation comprises at least one second s olvent which is different from the first solvent.
  • the second solvent can be selected from any organic solvents that are known in the art and suitable for dissolving RMs or RM mixtures.
  • the second solvent is selected from ketones such as acetone, methyl e thyl ketone (MEK), methyl propyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone (MIBK), cyclopentanone or cyclohexanone; acetates such as methyl, ethyl or butyl acetate or methyl acetoacetate; alcohols such as methanol, ethanol or isopropyl alcohol; alicyclic hydrocarbons such as cyclopentane or cyclohexane; halogenated 35 hydrocarbons such as di- or trichloromethane; glycols or their esters such as, PGME (propylene glycol 1-methyl ether), PGMEA (propylene glycol
  • the second solvent is selected from aliphatic ketones, cyclic 5 ketones, alkyl ethers of ethylene glycol or propylene glycol, or aromatic solvents.
  • the second solvent is selected from cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, DPMAc, PGMEA, PGME, menthyl isovalerate, MEK, MIBK, phenyl naphthalene and benzyl benzoate or mixtures thereof.
  • the second 10 solvent is selected from cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, PGME, PGMEA and MEK or mixtures thereof.
  • T he second solvent may also be selected from organic solvents having a boiling point below 180°C, in which case preferably its proportion in the solvent blend is 15 selected such that the entire solvent blend has a boiling point ⁇ 180°C.
  • the ratio (by weight) of the first and second solvents in the solvent blend of the RM f ormulation is preferably from 50:50 to 90:10, very preferably from 60:40 to 85:15, most preferably from 70:30 to 80:20. 20
  • the RM formulation contains only one or more, p referably exactly one, first solvent(s) selected formula S1 and S2 and their subformulae, very preferably from formula S1 and its subformulae.
  • the RM formulation contains a blend of one or more, preferably exactly one, first solvents and one or more, preferably exactly one, second solvents, wherein the first sovents are selected from formula S1 and S2 and their subformulae, very preferably from formula S1 and its subformulae, and the second solvent is preferably cyclohexanone.
  • the RM formulation and solvent blend do not contain any other solvents than the first and second solvents as defined above and below.
  • concentrations of the RMs and additives as give above 35 and below refer to the RM component or RM mixture of the RM formulation and may also expressed as “% by weight of total solids” or “% by weight of all solids”.
  • the proportion of all solvents in the RM formulation according to the present invention is preferably from 50 to 95%, very preferably from 60 to 95%, most 5 preferably from 65 to 90% by weight.
  • T he total concentration of all solids, including the RMs, in the RM formulation is preferably from 5 to 50%, more preferably from 5 to 40%, most preferably from 10 to 35% by weight.
  • the RM formulation comprises one or more RMs having one polymerizable functional group (monoreactive RMs) and/or one or more RMs having two or more polymerizable functional groups (di- or multireactive RMs).
  • the RM formulation comprises one or more di- or multi- reactive RMs.
  • Preferred groups A 1 and A 2 include, without limitation, furan, pyrrol, thiophene, oxazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, imidazole, phenylene, cyclohexylene, bicyclooctylene, cyclohexenylene, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, azulene, indane, fluorene, naphthalene, tetrahydronaphthalene, anthracene, phenanthrene and dithienothiophene, all of which are unsubstituted or substituted by 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups 30 L as defined above.
  • Particular preferred groups A 1 and A 2 are selected from 1,4-phenylene, pyridine-2,5- diyl, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl, thiophene-2,5-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro- n aphthalene-2,6-diyl, indane-2,5-diyl, bicyclooctylene or 1,4-cyclohexylene wherein 35 one or two non-adjacent CH2 groups are optionally replaced by O and/or S, wherein these groups are unsubstituted or substituted by 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups L as defined above.
  • Very preferred RMs of formula D are selected from the following formulae: 30 P a1 35 P (CH 2 ) x (O) z COO COO (O) z (CH 2 ) y P a2 P24068 De - 33 - ( L) r (L)r (L) r P a3 5 P a4 10 P a5 15 P a6 P a7 20 P b 25 P P d 30 P 2 x+1 2 y+1 e 35 wherein P 0 , L, r, x, y and z are as defined in formula Da, s is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and t is 0, 1 or 2.
  • the RM formulation contains one or more d ireactive RMs of formula D wherein at least one group Z1 denotes -C ⁇ C, very preferably selected from formulae Df, Dg, Dh, Di, Dk and Dm. 10
  • the RM formulation comprises one or more monoreactive RMs.
  • P referably the RMs of formula M are selected from the following formulae.
  • R P24068 De - 35 - 0 0 M4 5 P-(CH 2 ) x (O) z COO ( P0 0 (CH2)x(O)z A COO 5 10 (L) 0 P(CH2)x(O)z COO 6 15 0 7 P-(CH2)x(O)z COO ( L) r 20 P 0-(CH 2 ) x -(O) z COO 8 0 9 P(CH2)x-(O) z 25 (L)r 0 P(CH2)x(O)z 10 30 0 P-(CH 2 ) x (O) z 11 ( L) (L) 0 12 P-(CH2)x(O)z COO 35 0 13 P-(CH2)x(O)z H COO H H R P24068 De -
  • the RM formulation contains one or more m onoreactive RMs of formula M wherein the group MG1 contains at least one group Z1 that denotes -C ⁇ C, very preferably selected from formulae M8 to M10.
  • L is preferably selected from F, Cl, CN, NO2 or straight chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 12 C atoms, wherein the alkyl groups are optionally perfluorinated, or P-Sp-.
  • L is selected from F, Cl, CN, NO2, CH3, C2H5, C(CH3)3, CH(CH3)2, CH2CH(CH3)C2H5, OCH3, OC2H5, COCH3, COC2H5, COOCH3, COOC2H5, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, OC2F5 or P-Sp-, in particular F, Cl, CN, CH3, C2H5, C(CH3)3, P24068 De - 39 - CH(CH3)2, OCH3, COCH3 or OCF3, most preferably F, Cl, CH3, C(CH3)3, OCH3 or COCH3, or P-Sp-.
  • the RM formulation contains one or more RMs of formula T T 10 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings 15 P a polymerizable group, Sp a spacer group or a single bond, R 11 H, F, Cl, CN, alkyl, alkoxy, thioalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, 20 alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 15, preferably with 1 to 5, C atoms which is optionally optionally fluorinated, or P-Sp, A, B, D, and E are selected from the group consisting of 1,4-phenylene, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl, 25 anthracene-9,10-diyl, fluorene-2,7-diyl,
  • C is selected from the group consisting of benzene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4- diyl, anthracene-9,10-diyl, fluorene-2,7-diyl, dibenzofuran-2,7-diyl, dibenzothiophene-2,7-diyl, benzo[1,2-b:4,5-b']dithiophene-2,5-diyl, indole- 35 4,7-diyl, benzothiophene-4,7-diyl, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp.
  • the RMs of formula T show a high extraordinary refractive index n e and a high birefringence.
  • 35 P referably A, B, D and E in formula T are selected from the group consisting of P24068 De - 41 - 5 10 , 15 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings 20 L P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5, SC2H5, 25 r 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, s 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0 or 1, t 0, 1 or 2, preferably 0 or 1.
  • rings A, B, D and/or E in formula T are selected from the group consisting of benzene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene 2,6-diyl, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl, anthracene-9,10-diyl, fluorene-2,7-diyl, dibenzofuran-2,7-diyl, dibenzothiophene-2,7-diyl, benzo[1,2-b:4,5-b']dithiophene-2,5-diyl, indole-4,7-diyl, 35 benzothiophene-4,7-diyl, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L and/or P-Sp-.
  • P24068 De - 42 - Very preferably one, two, three, four or more of rings A, B, D and/or E in formula T are selected from the group consisting of 5 , 10 wherein L, on each occurrence identically or differently, denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, OCH 3 , SCH 3 , 15 C 2 H 5 , OC 2 H 5 , SC 2 H 5 .
  • L on each occurrence identically or differently, denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, -CN, F,
  • rings B and D are selected from the group consisting of benzene-1,4- diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl or anthracene-9,10-diyl, all of which 20 are optionally mono- or disubstituted by L and/or P-Sp-.
  • ring C in formula T is selected from the group consisting of 25 , , and 30 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings L P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated 35 and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5, SC2H5, r 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, P24068 De - 43 - s 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0 or 1, 5 t 0, 1 or 2, preferably 0 or 1.
  • C in formula T is selected from the group consisting of 10 , 15 20 wherein L, on each occurrence identically or differently, denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, OCH 3 , SCH 3 , C 2 H 5 , OC 2 H 5 , SC 2 H 5 .
  • 25 V ery preferably ring C in formula T is selected from the group consisting of benzene- 1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl or anthracene-9,10-diyl, all of which are optionally m ono- or disubstituted by L and/or P-Sp-.
  • TM1 to TM03 preferably L on each occurrence identically or differently denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated 35 and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, very preferably P- Sp-, methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, thiomethyl or thioethyl, most preferably methyl or ethyl, and r is preferably 0, 1, 2 or 3, very preferably 0, 1 or 2.
  • P24068 De - 47 - Very preferred are the groups of formulae TM01 to TM10, especially the groups of formula TM01 to TM07.
  • 5 V ery preferred compounds of formula T are selected from the following subformulae: 10 15 20 25 P- P- 30 0 35 1 P24068 De - 48 - 2 5 3 10 4 5 15 6 7 20 8 25 9 0 30 1 35 2 P24068 De - 49 - 23 5 24 1 25 26 1 27 2 28 2 29 30 3 31 3 P24068 De - 50 - 5 2 3 10 4 5 15 P-Sp N 6 P -Sp N 7 20 8 25 9 0 30 1 ( L) r P-Sp 2 35 3 P24068 De - 51 - ( L) r O (L) r P-Sp P T-44 5 ( L) r S P-Sp P T-45 10 T-46 T-47 15 T-48 T-49 20 (L) r L L P -Sp T-50 T-51 25 T-52 T-53 30 T-54 35 T-55 (L) r P-Sp T-56 P24068 De - 52 - T-57 5 T-58 T
  • L is preferably selected from alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl having 1 to 6, more preferably 1, 2 or 3 C atoms, very preferably from methyl or ethyl.
  • P is preferably acrylate. 25
  • Very preferred are the compounds of formulae T-1 to T-20, especially the compounds of formulae T-1 to T-16.
  • the RM formulation contains one or more RMs of formula T which contain a -C ⁇ C- group (acetylene 30 group) in the spacer, preferably a -C ⁇ C- group that is directly attached to an outer benzene or naphthalene group of the mesogenic core.
  • a phenylene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, or naphthalene-2,6-diyl preferably phenylene-1,4-diyl or naphthalene-2,6-diyl, in which, in addition, one or more CH groups in these groups may be replaced by N, and which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp-, 30
  • a A , B A and C A denote naphthalene-1,4-diyl, L F, Cl, -CN, -SCN, P-Sp-, or straight chain, branched or cyclic alkyl having 1 35 to 25 C atoms nally rep - C-, , , , , P24068 De - 58 - or , 5 in s uch a manner that O- and/or S-atoms are not directly connected with each other, and where
  • the compounds of formula A, preferably AA and BA are selected from the group consisting of P24068 De - 59 - 5 , 10 wherein at least one of A A and B A is selected from phenylene-1,4-diyl and napththalene-2,6-diyl, and wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings L P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated 15 and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, OCH 3 , SCH 3 , C 2 H 5 , OC 2 H 5 , SC 2 H 5 , CHO, COCH 3 , COOCH 3 or COOH, r 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, 20 s 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0 or 1,
  • rings AA and BA in formula A are selected from the group consisting of phenylene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl and naphthalene 2,6-diyl, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L and/or P-Sp-, wherein not more than one of A and B may denote naphthalene-1,4-diyl.
  • rings AA and BA in formula A are sel , 35 a nd , P24068 De - 60 - wherein not more than one of A A and B A may denote naphthalene-1,4-diyl and wherein L, on each occurrence identically or differently, denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, 5 or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, F, Cl, CN, CH3, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5 or SC2H5.
  • the ring BA is selected from the group consisting of phenylene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl and naphthalene-2,6-diyl, preferably phenylene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl and naphthalene-2,6-diyl, all of which
  • ring CA in formula A is selected from the group consisting of nd 20 , wherein L, on each occurrence identically or differently, denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, F, Cl, CN, CH 3 , OCH 3 , SCH 3 , 25 C 2 H 5 , OC 2 H 5 or SC 2 H 5 .
  • L on each occurrence identically or differently, denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, F, Cl, CN, CH 3 , OCH 3 , SCH 3 , 25 C 2 H 5 , OC 2 H
  • rings BA and CA together with the phenylene-1,4-diyl group form a group selected from the following formulae or their mirror images, wherein * d enotes the linkage to the acetylene group in formula A: 35 AM01 P24068 De - 61 - AM02 5 3 4 10 5 6 15 7 20 8 w
  • the naphthalene groups are optionally substituted with one or two groups L, r is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, and L is as defined in formula A.
  • each occurrence 25 identically or differently denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C a toms, very preferably P-Sp-, F, Cl, CN, CH3, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5 or SC2H5, most preferably CH3 or C2H5, and r is preferably 0, 1, 2 or 3, very preferably 0, 1 or 2.
  • 30 E specially preferred are the groups of formulae AM01, AM02, AM03, AM04, AM1, AM2 and AM3.
  • Very preferred compounds of formula A are selected from the following 35 subformulae: -1 P24068 De - 63 - 2 5 3 4 10 5 15 6 7 20 8 9 25 10 11 30 12 13 35 14 P24068 De - 64 - 15 5 16 17 10 18 19 15 20 20 21 22 25 23 30 24 25 35 26 P24068 De - 65 - 7 5 8 10 9 0 15 1 20 2 3 25 4 5 30 6 7 35 8 P24068 De - 66 - 39 5 0 1 10 2 15 3 4 20 5 6 25 7 8 30 9 0 35 1 P24068 De - 67 - 52 5 53 1 54 55 1 56 2 57 58 2 59 60 3 61 3 62 P24068 De - 68 - 63 5 64 10 wherein the naphthalene groups are optionally substituted with one or two groups L, and P, Sp, L and r, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the meanings given above, and R has one of the meanings given for R 11 in formula
  • L 15 i s preferably selected from F, Cl, CN, CH3, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5 or SC2H5.
  • P is preferably acrylate.
  • F urther preferred are the direactive compounds of the formulae A and A-1 to A-64 wherein one of the two groups Sp is a single bond and the other group Sp is 20 different from a single bond.
  • P is preferably selected from the group consisting of vinyloxy, acrylate, methacrylate, fluoroacrylate, chloroacrylate, oxetane and epoxide, very preferably 25 from acrylate and methacrylate, most preferably acrylate.
  • F urther preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein all polymerizable groups P that are present in the compound have the same meaning, and very preferably denote acrylate or 30 methacrylate, most preferably acrylate.
  • F urther preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, which contain one, two, three or four groups P-Sp, very preferably two or three groups P-Sp.
  • 35 F urther preferred are compounds of formula T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein R 11 is P-Sp-.
  • Sp 1 , and/or Sp 2 if present denotes a single bond or -(CH2)p1-, -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1, or -CO-O-(CH2)p1, wherein p1 is 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, and, if Sp is -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1 or -CO-O-(CH2)p1 the O-atom or CO-group, respectively, is linked to the benzene ring.
  • F urther preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein Sp 1 , and/or Sp 2 if present, is a single bond.
  • F urther preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as 25 described above and below, wherein Sp1, and/or Sp2 if present, is different from a single bond.
  • F urther preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein m is 1.
  • 35 F urther preferred are compounds of formula T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein L is P-Sp-, F, Cl, -CN, or straight chain, branched or cyclic P24068 De - 70 - alkyl having 1 to 25 C atoms, wherein one or more non-adjacent CH2-groups are optionally replaced by -O-, -S-, -CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, CR 0 CR 00 -, -C ⁇ C-, 5 i n s uch a manner that O- and/or S-atoms are not directly connected with each other, 10 and wherein one or more H atoms are each optionally replaced by P-Sp-, F or Cl, or two substituents L that are connected to directly adjacent C atoms may also form a cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl group with 5, 6, 7 or 8 C atom
  • L is F, Cl, CN or straight chain alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl having 1 to 6 C atoms or branched or cyclic alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl having 3 to 8 C a toms, most preferably F, Cl, CN, CH3, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5 or SC2H5.
  • Z11 and Z12 denote -COO-, -OCO-, -C ⁇ C- or a single bond, more preferably -C ⁇ C- or a single bond, most preferably a single bond.
  • T he compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae either taken alone or in combination with other RMs in an RM formulation, exhibit in particular and 25 preferably at the same time, a high birefringence, exhibit a good solubility in commonly known organic solvents used in mass production, show an improved alignment, have favorable transition temperatures, and show high resistance against yellowing after being exposed to UV light.
  • the RM formulation contains one or more compounds selected from formulae D, M, T, A and their subformulae.
  • the RM formulation contains, preferably 1 to 6, very preferably 1 to 4, RMs, preferably selected from D, M, T, A and their subformulae.
  • the RM formulation contains one or more di- or multireactive RMs of formula D or its subformulae, their concentration is preferably from 1 to 50%, very preferably from 5 to 30% of total solids.
  • P24068 De - 84 - If the RM formulation contains one or more monoreactive RMs of formula M or its 5 subformulae, their concentration is preferably from 1 to 70%, very preferably from 10 to 50% of total solids. If the RM formulation contains one or more RMs of formula T or its subformulae, their concentration is preferably from 1 to 70%, very preferably from 10 to 50% of 10 total solids.
  • the RM formulation contains one or more RMs of formula A or its subformulae, their concentration is preferably from 1 to 70%, very preferably from 10 to 50% of total solids. 15 I n another preferred embodiment, the RM formulation further comprises one or more chiral compounds which are optionally polymerizable and/or isomerizable. I n another preferred embodiment the RM formulation contains one or more, preferably exactly one, chiral compounds, preferably selected from polymerizable 20 c hiral compounds, very preferably selected from mono- or direactive chiral polymerizable compounds.
  • Suitable polymerizable chiral compounds preferably comprise one or more ring elements, linked together by a direct bond or via a linking group and, where two of 25 these ring elements optionally may be linked to each other, either directly or via a linking group, which may be identical to or different from the linking group mentioned.
  • the ring elements are preferably selected from the group of four-, five-, s ix- or seven-, preferably of five- or six-, membered rings.
  • Preferred polymerizable chiral compounds are selected from the formulae C1, C2 and C3: 35 C1 P24068 De - 85 - 5 C2 10 C3 15 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings P 0* a polymerizable group, 20 S p0* a spacer group or a single bond R0* F, Cl, CN, alkyl, alkoxy, thioalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 15, preferably 1 to 6 C atoms, 25 P0*- or P0*-Sp*-, A 0 , B 0 , E 0 , F 0 1,4-phenylene that is unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups L, or trans-1,4-cyclohexylene, 30 L F, Cl, CN, P-Sp-, or al
  • stereoisomers of formula C2 wherein the central isosorbide unit is replaced by an isomannide or isoidide unit.
  • the compounds of formula C1 are preferably selected from the following formula: 20 1-1 25 wherein A 0 , B 0 , Z 0* , X 2 , P 0 *, a and b have the meanings given in formula Ca or one o f the preferred meanings given above and below, and (OCO) denotes -O-CO- or a single bond.
  • the 35 concentration in the RM formulation is preferably from 0.1 to 10 %, more preferably from 0.5 to 8 % by weight of total solids.
  • P24068 De - 89 - Preferably the polymerizable chiral compounds have alone or in combination with e ach other an absolute value of the helical twisting power (IHTPtotalI) of 20 ⁇ m-1 or 5 more, preferably of 40 ⁇ m-1 or more, more preferably in the range of 60 ⁇ m-1 or more, most preferably in the range of 80 ⁇ m-1 or more to 260 ⁇ m-1 .
  • the RM formulation according to the present invention does not contain any chiral compounds.
  • the RM mixture contained in the RM formulation preferably exhibits a nematic phase or, in case a chiral compound is present, a chiral nematic (also referred to as “cholesteric”) LC phase, or a chiral smectic LC phase and a chiral nematic LC phase, very preferably a nematic or chiral nematic LC phase at room temperature.
  • 15 T he RM mixture contained in the RM formulation preferably has a birefringence ( ⁇ n) in the range from 0.18 to 0.8, more preferably in the range from 0.20 to 0.7 and even more preferably in the range from 0.25 to 0.6.
  • the RM formulation according to the present invention in addition to the polymerizable compounds of formula D, M, T and A or their subformulae, comprises one or more chiral isomerizable compounds, preferably selected from chiral photoisomerizable compounds.
  • the chiral isomerizable compounds can be polymerizable or not polymerizable. They can be non-mesogenic compounds or mesogenic compounds. If the chiral isomerizable compounds are polymerizable they can be monoreactive or multireactive.
  • the RM formulation according to the present invention comprises one or more chiral isomerizable compounds which are polymerizable. I n another preferred embodiment the RM formulation according to the present invention contains exactly one chiral isomerizable compound.
  • the RM formulation contains only chiral isomerizable compounds which are polymerizable, preferably selected from mono- or direactive chiral isomerizable compounds.
  • the RM formulation does not contain a chiral compound which 5 does not contain an isomerizable group, in particular does not contain a photoisomerizable group.
  • the RM formulation according to the present invention does not contain any other chiral compounds in addition to the chiral 10 isomerizable compound(s).
  • Suitable polymerizable chiral isomerizable compounds preferably comprise one or more ring elements, linked together by a direct bond or via a linking group and, where two of these ring elements optionally may be linked to each other, either 15 directly or via a linking group, which may be identical to or different from the linking group mentioned.
  • the ring elements are preferably selected from the group of four-, f ive-, six- or seven-, preferably of five- or six-, membered rings.
  • Preferred chiral isomerizable compounds are selected of formula I*: 20 R 3 -(A 3 -Z 3 )m-G(-(Z 4 -A 4 )l -R 4 )k I* wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings 25 R 3, R4 H, F, Cl, CN, P-Sp- or an alkyl radical with up to 25 C atoms which may be unsubstituted, mono- or polysubstituted by halogen or CN, it being also possible for one or more non-adjacent CH2 groups to be replaced, in each case independently from one another, by -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N(CH3)-, -CO-, - 30 COO- -OCO-, -OCO-O-, -S-CO-, -CO-S- or -C ⁇ C- in such a manner that oxygen atoms are not linked directly to
  • R 3 or R 4 is an alkyl or alkoxy radical, i.e. where the terminal CH 2 group is replaced by -O-, this may be straight-chain or branched.
  • It is preferably straight-chain, has 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 carbon atoms and accordingly is preferably ethyl, propyl, butyl, P24068 De - 92 - pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy, hexoxy, heptoxy, or octoxy, furthermore methyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, tetradecyl, 5 pentadecyl, methoxy, nonoxy, decoxy, undecoxy, dodecoxy, tridecoxy or tetradecoxy, for example.
  • Preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein at least 15 one of R 3 and R 4 , preferably both R 3 and R 4 , denote P-Sp-.
  • Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein at least one of R 3 and R 4 , preferably both R 3 and R 4 , is different from P-Sp-, and p referably denotes alkyl or alkoxy with 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to C atoms, and 20 one of R 3 and R 4 may also denote F, Cl or CN.
  • a 3 and A 4 are selected from the group consisting of 1,4-phenylene, 1,3-phenylene, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl, 9,10-dihydro- 25 phenanthrene-2,7-diyl, anthracene-2,7-diyl, anthracene-9,10-diyl, fluorene-2,7-diyl, dibenzothiophene-2,7-diyl, dibenzofuran-2,7-diyl, benzo[1,2-b:4,5-b']dithiophene- 2 ,5-diyl, indole-4,7-diyl, benzothiophene-4,7-diyl, coumarine, flavone, where, in addition, one
  • Very preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein A 3 a nd A4 are selected from the group consisting of 1,4-phenylene, naphthalene-1,4- P24068 De - 93 - diyl, naphthalene 2,6-diyl, 1,4-cyclohexylene in which, in addition, one or two non- adjacent CH2 groups may be replaced by O and/or S, 1,4-cyclohexenylene, 1,4- 5 bicyclo(2,2,2)octylene, piperidine-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, d ecahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl, or 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-naphthalene-2,6-diyl, very preferably 1,4-phenylene or 1,4-cyclohexylene, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp.
  • Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein Z3 and Z4 independently of each other denote -CO-O-, -O-CO- or a single bond.
  • Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein L is selected from F, Cl, CN, CH3, C2H5, OCH3, OC2H5, COCH3, COC2H5, CF3, OCF3, 15 P-Sp-, in particular F, Cl, CN, CH3, C2H5, OCH3, COCH3 or OCF3 , most preferably F, CH3, OCH3 or COCH3.
  • F urther preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein P is selected from the group consisting of vinyloxy, acrylate, methacrylate, 20 fluoroacrylate, chloroacrylate, oxetane and epoxide, very preferably from acrylate and methacrylate, most preferably acrylate.
  • Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein all 30 polymerizable groups P that are present in the compound have the same meaning, and very preferably denote acrylate or methacrylate, most preferably acrylate.
  • Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those which contain one, two, three or four groups P-Sp, very preferably two or three groups P- 35 Sp.
  • Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein at least one group Sp is a single bond.
  • P24068 De - 94 - Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein at 5 least one group Sp is a single bond and at least one group Sp is different from a single bond.
  • Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein at least one group Sp is different from a single bond, and is selected from -(CH2)p1-, - 10 O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1, or -CO-O-(CH2)p1, wherein p1 is an integer from 2 to 10, preferably 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, and, if Sp is -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1 or -CO-O-(CH2)p1 the O-atom or CO-group, respectively, is linked to the benzene ring.
  • R a or R b is a group of formula P-Sp-
  • the spacer groups on each 15 side of the mesogenic core may be identical or different.
  • m and l are preferably 0 or 1.
  • q is preferably 0 or 1, very preferably 0.
  • Particularly preferred compounds of the formula I*2, I3, I*5, I*6, I*7, I*9 and I*10 are those of the following formulae: R *-Phe-Z3-G-R** I*2-1 R*-Cyc-Z3-G-R** I*2-2 20 R*-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-R** I*3-1 R*-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-R** I*3-2 R*-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-R** I*3-3 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-G-R** I*5-1 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-G-R** I*5-2 25 P-Sp-G-Z4-Phe-R** I*6-1 P-Sp-G-Z4-Cyc-R** I*6-2 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-R** I*7-1 P-Sp-Cyc-Z
  • R* and R** are independently of each other alkyl or alkoxy with 1 to 12 C atoms, or alkyl or alkoxy with 1 to 12 C a toms and the other is F, Cl or CN.
  • -Sp- is preferably alkylene or 25 alkyleneoxy with 1 to 12 C atoms
  • P is preferably acrylate or methacrylate
  • Preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein G denotes or contains a photoisomerizable group.
  • Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those containing an isomerizable group selected from stilbene, (1,2-difluoro-2-phenyl-vinyl)-benzene, P24068 De - 97 - cinnamate, ⁇ -cyanocinnamate, 4-phenylbut-3-en-2-one, Schiff base, 2-benzyliden-1- i ndanone, chalcone, coumarin, chromone, pentalenone or azobenzene.
  • an isomerizable group selected from stilbene, (1,2-difluoro-2-phenyl-vinyl)-benzene, P24068 De - 97 - cinnamate, ⁇ -cyanocinnamate, 4-phenylbut-3-en-2-one, Schiff base, 2-benzyliden-1- i ndanone, chalcone, coumarin, chromone, pentalenone or azobenzene.
  • Formula A includes the following stereoisomers based on the corresponding dianhydrohexitols: 30 i 35 ii P24068 De - 98 - 5 iii 10 wherein X, L and q have the meanings given in formula A, and wherein Ai is based on isosorbide, Aii is based on isomannide and Aiii is based on isoidide. Especially preferred is Ai.
  • 5 V ery preferred compounds of formula I*A are selected from the following subformulae: 10 A1 15 20 A2 25 30 A3 35 P24068 De - 102 - 5 B1 10 15 B2 20 25 B3 30 wherein P, Sp, L and q have the meanings given in formula I* or one of the preferred meanings as given above and below, R* has one of the meanings of R 3 in formula I* which is different from P-Sp-, and R** has one of the meanings of R 4 in formula I* which is different from P-Sp-. 35 Especially preferred are the compounds of formula I*A3.
  • P is preferably acrylate or 5 methacrylate, very preferably acrylate
  • Sp is preferably -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1- or -CO-O-(CH2)p1-,, very preferably -O-(CH2)p1-, wherein the O-atom or CO-group, respectively, is linked to the benzene ring
  • p1 is an integer from 1 to 6, more preferably 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, and R 4 is preferably P-Sp-.
  • P is preferably acrylate or methacrylate, 10 very preferably acrylate
  • Sp is preferably -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1- or -CO-O- (CH2)p1-, very preferably -O-(CH2)p1-, wherein the O-atom or CO-group, respectively, is linked to the benzene ring
  • p1 is an integer from 1 to 6, more preferably 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6,
  • R* and R** are preferably, independently of each other, alkyl or alkoxy with 1 to 12, very preferably 1 to 6, C atoms.
  • the utilized chiral isomerizable compounds have each alone or in combination with each other an absolute value of the helical twisting power ( IHTPtotalI) of 20 ⁇ m-1 or more, preferably of 40 ⁇ m-1 or more, more preferably in the range of 60 ⁇ m-1 or more, most preferably in the range of 80 ⁇ m-1 or more to 25 260 ⁇ m-1 .
  • IHTPtotalI the helical twisting power
  • the RM formulation contains two or more chiral isomerizable compounds, these compounds may have the same or opposite twist sense. 30
  • the RM formulation contains only one chiral isomerizable compound, very preferably selected from formula I* or its subformulae, which is preferably polymerizable, i.e., which contains at least one group P-Sp-. I n another preferred embodiment the RM formulation does not contain any other 35 chiral compounds than those of formula I*.
  • P referably the proportion of the chiral isomerizable compounds, especially those selected from formula I* or its subformulae, in the RM formulation according to the P24068 De - 109 - present invention as a whole is in the range from 0.1 to 10 % by weight, very preferably in the range from 0.2 to 8.5 % by weight, most preferably in the range 5 from 0.5 to 4 % by weight of total solids
  • the RM formulation contains one or more chiral compounds which are not isomerizable. 10 By adding one or more non-isomerizable chiral compounds it is possible to adjust the central wavelength of the reflection band of the RM formulation.
  • the additional non- isomerizable chiral compound can have the same twist sense or opposite twist sense than the chiral isomerizable compound. Accordingly the reflection waveband 15 of the RM formulation will be shifted to shorter or longer wavelengths, respectively.
  • the RM formulation contains one or more, preferably exactly one, chiral isomerizable and polymerizable compound, especially selected from formula I* or its subformulae, and additionally contains one or more, 20 preferably exactly one, polymerizable chiral compound which is not isomerizable, and which very preferably has opposite twist sense than the chiral isomerizable and p olymerizable compound, and is preferably selected from formula C or its subformulae.
  • the RM formulation according to the present invention additionally comprises one or more chiral compounds which are not polymerizable and not isomerizable. These chiral compounds may be non- mesogenic compounds or mesogenic compounds.
  • the chiral, non-isomerizable compounds can have the same twist sense or opposite twist sense than the chiral isomerizable compound. Thereby it is possible to shift the r eflection waveband of the RM formulation to shorter or longer wavelengths as described above.
  • Preferred non-polymerizable and non-isomerizable chiral compounds are selected f rom the group consisting of compounds of formulae C-I to C-III, P24068 De - 110 - 5 -I 10 -II 15 -III 20 w herein formula C-II and C-III include the respective (S,S) enantiomers, and wherein E and F are each independently 1,4-phenylene or trans-1,4-cyclohexylene, 25 v is 0 or 1, Z0 is -COO-, -OCO-, -CH2CH2- or a single bond, and Rc is alkyl, alkoxy or alkanoyl with 1 to 12 C atoms.
  • stereoisomers of formula C-II wherein the central isosorbide unit is replaced by an isomannide or isoidide unit.
  • the compounds of formula C-I and their synthesis are described in EP1389199 A1.
  • the compounds of formula C-II and their synthesis are described in WO98/00428 A1.
  • the compounds of formula C-III and their synthesis are described in GB2328207 A.
  • 35 Further preferred additional chiral dopants are e.g. the commercially available R/S- 6011, R/S-5011, R/S-4011, R/S-3011, R/S-2011, R/S-1011, R/S-811 and CB-15 (from Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany).
  • the amount of the non-polymerizable chiral dopants in the RM formulation is 5 preferably from 0.1 to 10 %, more preferably from 0.5 to 8 % by weight of total solids.
  • T he total proportion of the compounds selected from formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae and optionally from formulae C1, C2, C3, D, M, I* and their subformulae, 10 in the RM formulation according to the present invention is preferably from 85 to 100%, more preferably from 85 to 99%, very preferably from 90 to 99% of total solids, i.e., excluding the solvents.
  • the RM formulation additionally comprises one or more 15 additives selected from the group consisting of polymerization initiators, surfactants, stabilisers, catalysts, sensitizers, inhibitors, chain-transfer agents, co-reacting m onomers, reactive thinners, surface-active compounds, lubricating agents, wetting agents, dispersing agents, hydrophobing agents, adhesive agents, flow improvers, degassing or defoaming agents, deaerators, diluents, reactive diluents, auxiliaries, 20 colourants, dyes, pigments and nanoparticles.
  • additives selected from the group consisting of polymerization initiators, surfactants, stabilisers, catalysts, sensitizers, inhibitors, chain-transfer agents, co-reacting m onomers, reactive thinners, surface-active compounds, lubricating agents, wetting agents, dispersing agents, hydrophobing agents, adhesive agents, flow improvers, degassing or defoaming agents, de
  • the RM mixture and/or RM formulation do not contain a compound with at least one CF3 or CF2 group (PFAS), and very preferably the RM mixture and/or RM formulation do not contain a 25 compound with a polyfluorinated alkyl or aryl group or a perfuorocarbon group. More preferably the RM mixture and/or RM formulation do not contain a compound with a f luorinated aliphatic C atom, most preferably the RM mixture and/or RM formulation do not contain a compound with a fluorinated C atom.
  • the RM mixtures and RM formulations according to this preferred embodiment do thus enable a reduction of 30 perfluorocarbons.
  • T he RM mixture and/or RM formulation as described above and below, which do not contain a PFAS, more preferably do not contain a perfluorocarbon compound, very preferably do not contain compound with a polyfluorinated C atom, and most 35 preferably do not contain a compound with a fluorinated C atom, are another object of the invention.
  • the RM mixure or RM formulation comprises one or more specific antioxidant additives, preferably selected from the Irganox® series, e.g. the 5 commercially available antioxidants Irganox®1076 and Irganox®1010, from Ciba, Switzerland.
  • the RM formulation comprises a combination of one or more, more preferably of two or more photoinitiators, for example, selected 10 from the commercially available Irgacure® or Darocure® (Ciba AG) series, in p articular, Irgacure 127, Irgacure 184, Irgacure 369, Irgacure 651, Irgacure 817, Irgacure 907, Irgacure 1300, Irgacure, Irgacure 2022, Irgacure 2100, Irgacure 2959, or Darcure TPO, further selected from the commercially available OXE02 (Ciba AG), NCI 930, N1919T (Adeka), SPI-03 or SPI-04 (Samyang), TR-PBG 304 or TR-PGB 15 345 (Tronly).
  • photoinitiators for example, selected 10 from the commercially available Irgacur
  • the photoinitiator is preferably selected such that it has an absorption maximum which is different from, very preferably at least 15 nm higher or lower than, the absorption maximum of the chiral photoisomerizable compound.
  • the concentration of the polymerization initiator(s) as a whole in the RM mixure or RM formulation is preferably from 0.1 to 6%, very preferably from 0.3 to 5%, more preferably from 0.7 to 4%.
  • the RM mixure or RM formulation optionally comprises one or more additives selected from polymerizable non-mesogenic compounds (reactive thinners). The amount of these additives in the RM formulation i s preferably from 0 to 30 %, very preferably from 0 to 25 % of total solids.
  • the reactive thinners used are not only substances which are referred to in the actual sense as reactive thinners, but also auxiliary compounds already mentioned above which contain one or more complementary reactive units, for example h ydroxyl, thiol-, or amino groups, via which a reaction with the polymerizable units of the liquid-crystalline compounds can take place.
  • the substances which are usually capable of photopolymerization include, for e xample, mono-, bi- and polyfunctional compounds containing at least one olefinic double bond.
  • Examples thereof are vinyl esters of carboxylic acids, for example of P24068 De - 113 - lauric, myristic, palmitic and stearic acid, and of dicarboxylic acids, for example of succinic acid, adipic acid, allyl and vinyl ethers and methacrylic and acrylic esters of 5 monofunctional alcohols, for example of lauryl, myristyl, palmityl and stearyl alcohol, and diallyl and divinyl ethers of bifunctional alcohols, for example ethylene glycol and 1,4-butanediol.
  • carboxylic acids for example of P24068 De - 113 - lauric, myristic, palmitic and stearic acid
  • dicarboxylic acids for example of succinic acid, adipic acid, allyl and vinyl ethers and methacrylic and acrylic esters of 5 monofunctional alcohols, for example of lauryl, myristyl, palmityl and stearyl alcohol, and
  • methacrylic and acrylic esters of polyfunctional 10 alcohols are also suitable, for example, methacrylic and acrylic esters of polyfunctional 10 alcohols, in particular those which contain no further functional groups, or at most ether groups, besides the hydroxyl groups.
  • examples of such alcohols are bifunctional alcohols, such as ethylene glycol, propylene glycol and their more highly condensed representatives, for example diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, tripropylene glycol etc., butanediol, pentanediol, hexanediol, 15 neopentyl glycol, alkoxylated phenolic compounds, such as ethoxylated and propoxylated bisphenols, cyclohexanedimethanol, trifunctional and polyfunctional alcohols, such as glycerol, trimethylolpropane, butanetriol, trimethylolethane, pentaerythritol, ditrimethylolpropane,
  • polyester (meth)acrylates which are the (meth)acrylic ester of polyesterols.
  • suitable polyesterols are those which can be prepared by esterification 25 of polycarboxylic acids, preferably dicarboxylic acids, using polyols, preferably diols.
  • the starting materials for such hydroxyl-containing polyesters are known to the person skilled in the art.
  • Dicarboxylic acids which can be employed are succinic, glutaric acid, adipic acid, sebacic acid, o-phthalic acid and isomers and hydrogenation products thereof, and esterifiable and transesterifiable derivatives of 30 said acids, for example anhydrides and dialkyl esters.
  • Suitable polyols are the a bovementioned alcohols, preferably ethyleneglycol, 1,2- and 1,3-propylene glycol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,6-hexanediol, neopentyl glycol, cyclohexanedimethanol and p olyglycols of the ethylene glycol and propylene glycol type.
  • Suitable reactive thinners are furthermore 1,4-divinylbenzene, triallyl cyanurate, acrylic esters of tricyclodecenyl alcohol of the following formula P24068 De - 114 - 5 also known under the name dihydrodicyclopentadienyl acrylate, and the allyl esters of acrylic acid, methacrylic acid and cyanoacrylic acid. 10
  • those containing photopolymerizable groups are used in particular and in view of the abovementioned preferred compositions.
  • This group includes, for example, dihydric and polyhydric alcohols, for example 15 ethylene glycol, propylene glycol and more highly condensed representatives thereof, for example diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, tripropylene glycol etc., butanediol, pentanediol, hexanediol, neopentyl glycol, cyclohexanedimethanol, glycerol, trimethylolpropane, butanetriol, trimethylolethane, pentaerythritol, ditrimethylolpropane, dipentaerythritol, sorbitol, mannitol and the 20 corresponding alkoxylated, in particular ethoxylated and propoxylated alcohols.
  • dihydric and polyhydric alcohols for example 15 ethylene glycol, propylene glycol and more highly condensed representatives thereof, for example diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, di
  • the group furthermore also includes, for example, alkoxylated phenolic compounds, for example ethoxylated and propoxylated bisphenols. 25
  • These reactive thinners may furthermore be, for example, epoxide or urethane (meth)acrylates.
  • Epoxide (meth)acrylates are, for example, those as obtainable by the reaction, k nown to the person skilled in the art, of epoxidized olefins or poly- or diglycidyl 30 ether, such as bisphenol A diglycidyl ether, with (meth)acrylic acid.
  • Urethane (meth)acrylates are, in particular, the products of a reaction, likewise k nown to the person skilled in the art, of hydroxylalkyl (meth)acrylates with poly- or diisocyanates. 35 Such epoxide and urethane (meth)acrylates are included amongst the compounds listed above as “mixed forms”.
  • P24068 De - 115 - If reactive thinners are used, their amount and properties must be matched to the respective conditions in such a way that, on the one hand, a satisfactory desired 5 effect, for example the desired colour of the composition according to the invention, is achieved, but, on the other hand, the phase behaviour of the liquid-crystalline composition is not excessively impaired.
  • the low-crosslinking (high-crosslinking) liquid-crystalline compositions can be prepared, for example, using corresponding reactive thinners which have a relatively low (high) number of reactive units per 10 molecule.
  • the group of diluents include, for example: C1-C4-alcohols, for example methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, butanol, 15 isobutanol, sec-butanol and, in particular, the C5-C12-alcohols n-pentanol, n- hexanol, n-heptanol, n-octanol, n-nonanol, n-decanol, n-undecanol and n- d odecanol, and isomers thereof, glycols, for example 1,2-ethylene glycol, 1,2- and 1,3-propylene glycol, 1,2-, 2,3- and 1,4-butylene
  • these diluents can also be mixed with 35 water.
  • suitable diluents are C1-C4-alcohols, for example methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, butanol, isobutanol and sec-butanol, g lycols, for example 1,2-ethylene glycol, 1,2- and 1,3-propylene glycol, 1,2-, 2,3- and 1,4-butylene glycol, di- and triethylene glycol, and di- and tripropylene glycol, P24068 De - 116 - ethers, for example tetrahydrofuran and dioxane, ketones, for example acetone, methyl ethyl ketone and diacetone alcohol (4-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone), and 5 C1-
  • the diluents are optionally employed in a proportion of from about 0 to 10.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 5.0% by weight, based on the total weight of the RM formulation.
  • the RM formulation comprises one or more additives selected from the group consisting of antifoams and deaerators (c1)), lubricants and flow auxiliaries (c2)), thermally curing or radiation-curing auxiliaries (c3)), substrate wetting auxiliaries (c4)), wetting and dispersion auxiliaries (c5)), 15 hydrophobicizing agents (c6)), adhesion promoters (c7)) and auxiliaries for p romoting scratch resistance (c8)), wherein the additives of groups cannot always strictly be delimited from one another in their action.
  • lubricants and flow auxiliaries often also act as antifoams and/or 20 deaerators and/or as auxiliaries for improving scratch resistance.
  • Radiation-curing auxiliaries can also act as lubricants and flow auxiliaries and/or deaerators and/or as substrate wetting auxiliaries. In individual cases, some of these auxiliaries can also fulfil the function of an adhesion promoter (c8)). 25
  • a certain additive can therefore be classified in a number of the groups c1) to c8) described below.
  • the antifoams in group c1) include silicon-free and silicon-containing polymers.
  • the silicon-containing polymers are, for example, unmodified or modified 30 polydialkylsiloxanes or branched copolymers, comb or block copolymers comprising polydialkylsiloxane and polyether units, the latter being obtainable from ethylene oxide or propylene oxide.
  • the deaerators in group c1) include, for example, organic polymers, for example 35 polyethers and polyacrylates, dialkylpolysiloxanes, in particular dimethylpolysiloxanes, organically modified polysiloxanes, for example arylalkyl- modified polysiloxanes, and fluorosilicones.
  • P24068 De - 117 - The action of the antifoams is essentially based on preventing foam formation or destroying foam that has already formed.
  • Antifoams essentially work by promoting 5 coalescence of finely divided gas or air bubbles to give larger bubbles in the medium to be deaerated, for example the compositions according to the invention, and thus accelerate escape of the gas (of the air). Since antifoams can frequently also be employed as deaerators and vice versa, these additives have been included together under group c1).
  • auxiliaries are, for example, commercially available from Tego as TEGO® Foamex 800, TEGO® Foamex 805, TEGO® Foamex 810, TEGO® Foamex 815, TEGO® Foamex 825, TEGO® Foamex 835, TEGO® Foamex 840, TEGO® Foamex 842, TEGO® Foamex 1435, TEGO® Foamex 1488, TEGO® Foamex 1495, TEGO® 15 Foamex 3062, TEGO® Foamex 7447, TEGO® Foamex 8020, Tego® Foamex N, TEGO® Foamex K 3, TEGO® Antifoam 2-18,TEGO® Antifoam 2-18, TEGO® Antifoam 2-57, TEGO® Antifoam 2-80, TEGO® Antifoam 2-82, TEGO® Antifoam 2- 89, TEGO® Antifoam 2-92, TEGO®
  • the auxiliaries in group c1) are optionally employed in the RM formulation in a proportion of from about 0 to 3.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 2.0% by 5 weight of total solids.
  • the lubricants and flow auxiliaries typically include silicon-free, but also silicon-containing polymers, for example polyacrylates or modifiers, low-molecular- weight polydialkylsiloxanes.
  • the modification consists in some of the alkyl groups 10 having been replaced by a wide variety of organic radicals. These organic radicals are, for example, polyethers, polyesters or even long-chain alkyl radicals, the former being used the most frequently.
  • the polyether radicals in the correspondingly modified polysiloxanes are usually 15 built up from ethylene oxide and/or propylene oxide units. Generally, the higher the proportion of these alkylene oxide units in the modified polysiloxane, the more hydrophilic is the resultant product.
  • auxiliaries are, for example, commercially available from Tego as TEGO® 20 Glide 100, TEGO® Glide ZG 400, TEGO® Glide 406, TEGO® Glide 410, TEGO® Glide 411, TEGO® Glide 415, TEGO® Glide 420, TEGO® Glide 435, TEGO® Glide 440, TEGO® Glide 450, TEGO® Glide A 115, TEGO® Glide B 1484 (can also be used as antifoam and deaerator), TEGO® Flow ATF, TEGO® Flow 300, TEGO® Flow 460, TEGO® Flow 425 and TEGO® Flow ZFS 460.
  • Suitable radiation-curable 25 lubricants and flow auxiliaries which can also be used to improve the scratch resistance, are the products TEGO® Rad 2100, TEGO® Rad 2200, TEGO® Rad 2500, TEGO® Rad 2600 and TEGO® Rad 2700, which are likewise obtainable from TEGO.
  • Such-auxiliaries are available, for example, from BYK as BYK®-300 BYK®-306, BYK®-307, BYK®-310, BYK®-320, BYK®-333, BYK®-341, Byk® 354, Byk®361, Byk®361N, BYK®388.
  • T he auxiliaries in group c2) are optionally employed in the formulation in a 35 proportion of from about 0 to 3.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 2.0% by w eight of total solids.
  • the radiation-curing auxiliaries include, in particular, polysiloxanes having terminal double bonds which are, for example, a constituent of an acrylate 5 group.
  • Such auxiliaries can be crosslinked by actinic or, for example, electron radiation.
  • the uncrosslinked state they can act as antifoams, deaerators, lubricants and flow auxiliaries and/or substrate wetting auxiliaries, while, in the crosslinked state, they increase, in particular, the scratch resistance, for example of coatings or films which 10 can be produced using the compositions according to the invention.
  • the improvement in the gloss properties for example of precisely those coatings or films, is regarded essentially as a consequence of the action of these auxiliaries as antifoams, deaerators and/or lubricants and flow auxiliaries (in the uncrosslinked state).
  • thermally curing auxiliaries in group c3) contain, for example, primary OH groups which are able to react with isocyanate groups, for example of the binder.
  • thermally curing auxiliaries which can be used are the products BYK®- 370, BYK®-373 and BYK®-375 available from BYK.
  • the auxiliaries in group c3) are optionally employed in the RM formulation in a proportion of from about 0 to 5.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 3.0% by w eight of total solids.
  • the substrate wetting auxiliaries in group c4) serve, in particular, to increase the wettability of the substrate to be printed or coated, for example, by printing inks or coating compositions, for example compositions according to the invention.
  • the generally attendant improvement in the lubricant and flow behaviour of such printing inks or coating compositions has an effect on the appearance of the finished (for 35 example crosslinked) print or coating.
  • auxiliaries are commercially available, for example from Tego as TEGO® Wet KL 245, TEGO® Wet 250, TEGO® Wet 260 and TEGO® Wet ZFS P24068 De - 120 - 453 and from BYK as BYK®-306, BYK®-307, BYK®-310, BYK®-333, BYK®-344, BYK®-345, BYK®-346 and Byk®-348.
  • the auxiliaries in group c4) are optionally employed in a proportion of from about 0 to 3.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 1.5% by weight, based on the total weight of the liquid-crystalline composition.
  • the wetting and dispersion auxiliaries in group c5) serve, in particular, to prevent the flooding and floating and the sedimentation of pigments and are therefore, if necessary, suitable in particular in pigmented compositions according to the invention.
  • These auxiliaries stabilize pigment dispersions essentially through electrostatic repulsion and/or steric hindrance of the pigment particles containing these additives, where, in the latter case, the interaction of the auxiliary with the ambient medium (for example binder) plays a major role.
  • the use of such wetting and dispersion auxiliaries is common practice, for example in the technical area of printing inks and paints, the selection of a suitable auxiliary of this type generally does not present the person skilled in the art with any difficulties, if they are used.
  • Such wetting and dispersion auxiliaries are commercially available, for example from Tego, as TEGO® Dispers 610, TEGO® Dispers 610 S, TEGO® Dispers 630, TEGO® Dispers 700, TEGO® Dispers 705, TEGO® Dispers 710, TEGO® Dispers 720 W, TEGO® Dispers 725 W, TEGO® Dispers 730 W, TEGO® Dispers 735 W and TEGO® Dispers 740 W and from BYK as Disperbyk®, Disperbyk®-107, 30 Disperbyk®-108, Disperbyk®-110, Disperbyk®-111, Disperbyk®-115, Disperbyk®- 130, Disperbyk®-160, Disperbyk®-161, Disperbyk®-162, Disperbyk®-163, Disperbyk®-164, Disperbyk®-165, Disperbyk®-166, Disperbyk®-167, Disperbyk®- 170
  • P24068 De - 121 - The amount of the auxiliaries in group c5) used on the mean molecular weight of the auxiliary. In any case, a preliminary experiment is therefore advisable, but this can 5 be accomplished simply by the person skilled in the art.
  • T he hydrophobicizing agents in group c6) can be used to give water-repellent properties to prints or coatings produced, for example, using compositions according to the invention.
  • Such hydrophobicizing agents are commercially available, for example, from Tego as Tego® Phobe WF, Tego® Phobe 1000, Tego® Phobe 1000 S, Tego® Phobe 1010, Tego® Phobe 1030, Tego® Phobe 1010, Tego® Phobe 1010, Tego® Phobe 1 030, Tego® Phobe 1040, Tego® Phobe 1050, Tego® Phobe 1200, Tego® Phobe 1300, Tego® Phobe 1310 and Tego® Phobe 1400.
  • T he auxiliaries in group c6) are optionally employed in the RM formulation in a proportion of from about 0 to 5.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 3.0% by w eight of total solids.
  • Adhesion promoters from group c7) serve to improve the adhesion of two interfaces in contact. It is directly evident from this that essentially the only fraction of the adhesion promoter that is effective is that located at one or the other or at both interfaces.
  • adhesion 35 promoter must be added directly to the latter or the substrate must be pre-treated with the adhesion promoters (also known as priming), i.e. this substrate is given modified chemical and/or physical surface properties.
  • adhesion promoters also known as priming
  • Adhesion promoters in the broader sense which may be mentioned are also the substrate wetting auxiliaries already listed under group c4), but these generally do not have the same adhesion promotion capacity.
  • the multiplicity of adhesion promoter systems is not surprising.
  • Adhesion promoters based on silanes are, for example, 3- aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3- 20 aminopropylmethyldiethoxysilane, N-aminoethyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, N- aminoethyl-3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, N-methyl-3- aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-ureidopropyltriethoxysilane, 3- methacryloyloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidyloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3- mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-chloropropyltrimethoxysilane and 25 vinyltrimethoxysilane.
  • the auxiliaries for improving the scratch resistance in group c8) include, for example, the abovementioned products TEGO® Rad 2100, TEGO® Rad 2200, TEGO® Rad 2500, TEGO® Rad 2600 and TEGO® Rad 2700, which are available from Tego. 10
  • the amount data given for group c3) are likewise suitable, i.e.
  • alkylated monophenols such as 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 2-tert-butyl-4,6- 20 dimethylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-ethylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-n-butylphenol, 2,6- di-tert-butyl-4-isobutylphenol, 2,6-dicyclopentyl-4-methylphenol, 2-( ⁇ - methylcyclohexyl)-4,6-dimethylphenol, 2,6-dioctadecyl-4-methylphenol, 2,4,6- tricyclohexylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4
  • the RM mixture or RM formulation comprises one or more components selected from the group consisting of the following components or any combination thereof: a ) one or more multi – or direactive polymerizable mesogenic compounds, 10 preferably selected from compounds of formula D and its subformulae, and/or b) one or more monoreactive polymerizable mesogenic compounds, preferably selected from compounds of formula M and its subformulae, and/or c) one or more polymerizable mesogenic compounds selected from compounds of formula T and A and their subformulae, and/or 15 d) one or more polymerizable chiral compounds, preferably selected from formula C or its subformulae, and/or e) one or more chiral isomerizable compounds, which can be polymerizable or non-polymerizable, preferably selected from formula I*, f ) one or more non-polymerizable and non-isomerizable chiral compounds, 20 preferably selected from formulae C-I, C
  • the RM mixture or RM formulation comprises: 1 ) one or more compounds of formula T or A, or their preferred subformulae, and P24068 De - 131 - 2) optionally one or more, preferably two or more, direactive polymerizable mesogenic compounds, preferably selected from formula Da-1, 5 3) optionally one or more, preferably two or more, monoreactive polymerizable mesogenic compounds, preferably selected from formulae M-1, M-4, M-6 and M-8 to M10, and/or 4) optionally one or more polymerizable chiral compounds, preferably selected from formulae C or its subformulae, and/or 10 5) optionally one or more chiral isomerizable compounds, preferably selected from formula I*, more preferably from formula I*A, or their corresponding preferred subformulae, and/or 6 ) optionally one or more non-polymerizable and non-isomerizable chiral compounds, preferably selected from formulae C-I, C-II and C
  • the RM mixtures and RM formulations can be prepared in a manner conventional per se, for example by mixing one or more of the above-mentioned RMs as defined a bove, and optionally with further additives and dissolving these RMs and additives 25 in a solvent or solvent blend.
  • T he invention further relates to a process of preparing a polymer or polymer film from an RM formulation as described above and below, comprising the steps of depositing a layer of the RM formulation onto a substrate, optionally removing the 30 solvents, optionally annealing the layer containing the RMs, preferably aligning the R Ms into uniform orientation, and polymerizing the RMs, preferably at a temperature where the RMs exhibit a liquid crystal phase, and wherein the RM formulation is preferably deposited onto the substrate by a printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing. 35 P referably the RMs are aligned into uniform orientation.
  • RMs or P24068 De - 132 - the RM mixture exhibit a liquid crystal phase, preferably a nematic or a cholesteric (chiral nematic) phase.
  • a preferred embodiment of the invention relates to a process of preparing a polymer f ilm, comprising, preferably consisting of, the steps of - depositing a layer of an RM formulation as described above and below onto a substrate, which is optionally provided with an alignment layer, preferably by a 10 printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing, - removing the solvents, - optionally annealing the RM layer (i.e., without solvents), preferably at a temperature where the RM mixture exhibit a nematic or cholesteric phase, - irradiating the RM layer with actinic radiation, preferably with UV radiation, 15 causing polymerization of the RMs and formation of a polymer film, - optionally removing the polymer film from the substrate.
  • the process of preparing the polymer film comprises two UV irradiation steps, and more precisely comprises, preferably c onsists of, the steps of - depositing a layer of the RM formulation as described above and below onto a substrate, which is optionally provided with an alignment layer, preferably by a 25 printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing, - removing the solvents, - optionally annealing the RM layer (i.e., without solvents), preferably at a temperature where the RM mixture is in the cholesteric phase, - a first step of irradiation of the RM layer with actinic radiation, preferably with UV 30 radiation, in air (1 st UV step), - optionally annealing the RM layer, preferably at a temperature where the RM mixture is in the cholesteric phase, and
  • the invention further relates to a polymer or polymer film obtainable by one of the processes as described above and below.
  • P24068 De - 133 - Preferably in the processes according to the present invention all printing, irradiation 5 or UV exposure steps are carried out at room temperature.
  • the first irradiation or 1 st UV step causes photoisomerization of the chiral compound comprising the photoisomerizable group and provides the chiral 10 structure with the biased helical pitch.
  • the second irradiation or 2 nd UV step causes p hotopolymerization of the polymerizable mesogenic compounds and thereby fixes the chiral structure.
  • This process can be advantageously used to obtain a chiral pitch gradient in the film thickness direction, wherein the chiral rotation angle increases or decreases incrementally through the film thickness.
  • the RM formulation can be deposited onto the substrate by conventional coating or printing techniques which are known to the expert, including but not limited to spin c oating, bar coating, slot die coating, inkjet printing, nozzle printing, screen printing, flexographic printing, offset printing, reel-to-reel printing, letter press printing, gravure printing, rotogravure printing, intaglio printing, pad printing, heat-seal 25 printing, or printing by means of a stamp or printing plate. Very preferred are printing methods, especially inkjet printing. Suitable substrate mediums and substrates are known to the expert and described in the literature, as for example conventional substrates used in the optical films 30 industry, such as glass or plastic.
  • polyester such as polyethyleneterephthalate (PET) or polyethylenenaphthalate (PEN), polyvinylalcohol (PVA), polycarbonate (PC), t riacetylcellulose (TAC), cyclo-olefin polymers (COP), or commonly known color filter materials, preferably triacetylcellulose (TAC), cyclo-olefin polymers (COP), or 35 commonly known colour filter materials.
  • PET polyethyleneterephthalate
  • PEN polyethylenenaphthalate
  • PVA polyvinylalcohol
  • PC polycarbonate
  • TAC t riacetylcellulose
  • COP cyclo-olefin polymers
  • the substrate has a surface grating or surface pattern, preferably a diffraction grating, very preferably a PB grating.
  • the substrate is prepared from a photoalignment layer (PAL) which is patterned by laser interferometry to create a grating pattern with a defined 5 pitch.
  • PAL photoalignment layer
  • an additional alignment layer capable of inducing the desired alignment can be used adjacent to the RM layer.
  • planar alignment can be 10 promoted by coating the substrate with a polyimide layer, and then rubbing the alignment layer with a velvet cloth.
  • Other suitable planar alignment layers are known in the art, like for example rubbed polyimide or alignment layers prepared by photoalignment as described in US 15 5,602,661, US 5,389,698 or US 6,717,644.
  • the process according to the invention contains a 25 process step where the RM mixture or RM formulation is allowed to rest for a period of time in order to evenly redistribute the polymerizable LC medium on the substrate (herein referred to as “annealing”).
  • annealing after providing the RM mixture or RM formulation onto 30 the substrate, the RM layer is annealed for a given period of time and at a given temperature.
  • the annealing time is preferably between 10 seconds and 1 hour, preferably between 20 seconds and 10 minutes and most preferably between 30 seconds and 35 5 minutes.
  • the annealing is preferably performed at a temperature from room temperature to 100°C, very preferably at room temperature.
  • the RM mixture preferably consists of compounds that align spontaneously when 5 being deposited as a mixture onto the substrate. Therefore, preferably the RM mixture is not subjected to heat treatment to align the mesogenic or liquid-crystalline compounds before the UV exposure. If necessary, the layer can be cooled down to room temperature after annealing at 10 an elevated temperature. The cooling can be performed actively with the help of cooling aids or passively just by letting the layer stack rest for a given time. P hotopolymerization of the RM layer (hereinafter also referred to as “curing”) is preferably achieved by exposing it to actinic radiation.
  • Actinic radiation means 15 irradiation with light, like UV light, IR light or visible light, irradiation with X-rays or gamma rays, or irradiation with high-energy particles, such as ions or electrons.
  • light like UV light, IR light or visible light, irradiation with X-rays or gamma rays, or irradiation with high-energy particles, such as ions or electrons.
  • polymerization is carried out by photo irradiation, in particular with UV light.
  • a source for actinic radiation for example a single UV lamp or a set of UV lamps can be used. When using a high lamp power the curing time can be reduced.
  • Another possible source for photo radiation is a laser, like e.g. a UV laser, an IR laser, or a visible laser.
  • T he curing time is dependent, inter alia, on the reactivity of the RMs and other polymerizable components, the thickness of the RM layer, and the power and 25 selected wavelength of the UV lamp. By optimizing the curing time and the curing temperature it is also possible to improve the alignment quality of the polymer film. 30
  • the curing time is preferably ⁇ 5 minutes, very preferably ⁇ 3 minutes, more preferably ⁇ 90 seconds, most preferably from 30 to 90 seconds. For mass production, curing times of ⁇ 60 seconds or even ⁇ 30 seconds are preferred.
  • the curing temperature is preferably from room temperature to 50°C, very 35 preferably from 35 to 45°C.
  • the curing time is preferably at least 50 seconds, more preferably from 50 to 90 seconds.
  • a suitable UV radiation power in the 1 st UV step is preferably in the range from 5 to 300 mWcm -2 , more preferably in the range from 50 to 250 mWcm -2 and most 5 preferably in the range from 100 to 180 mWcm -2 .
  • a suitable UV dose is preferably in the range from 20 to 1000 mJcm -2 , more preferably in the range from 30 to 800 mJcm -2 , very preferably in the range from 40 to 500 mJcm -2 , most 10 preferably in the range from 40 to 200 mJcm -2 .
  • the first irradiation step or 1 st UV step for isomerizing the chiral c ompound is preferably performed in air.
  • the first irradiation step or 1st UV 15 step is preferably performed at room temperature.
  • a suitable UV radiation power for the photopolymerization is preferably in the range from 100 to 1000 mWcm-2, more preferably in the range from 200 to 800 mWcm -2 and most preferably in the range from 300 to 600 mWcm -2 .
  • a suitable UV dose is preferably in the range from 25 to 16500 mJcm -2 , more preferably in the range from 50 to 7200 mJcm -2 , very preferably in the range from 100 to 3500 mJcm- 2 and most preferably in the range from 200 to 2000 mJcm -2 .
  • 25 P hotopolymerization (or the second irradiation step or 2nd UV step of the two-step process) is preferably performed under an inert gas atmosphere, preferably in a n itrogen atmosphere. Further preferably photopolymerization (or the second irradiation step or 2nd UV step in the two-step process) is preferably performed at 30 room temperature.
  • T he preferred thickness and retardation of a polymer film according to the present invention is determined by the optical properties desired from the film or the final product. 35 For optical applications of the polymer film, it preferably has a thickness of from 0.1 to 10 ⁇ m, very preferably from 0.1 to 2 ⁇ m, in particular from 0.1 to 1 ⁇ m.
  • the polymer film according to the present invention shows planar alignment, i.e., the LC molecules are oriented parallel to the film plane 5 and the helical axis is oriented substantially perpendicular to the film plane.
  • the polymer film according to the present invention shows tilted alignment, i.e., the LC molecules are oriented at an angle to the film plane and the helical axis is oriented at an angle to the film plane, also referred as 10 tilt angle.
  • the tilt angle between the helix axis and the axis normal to the film plane is from 5° to 45°, very preferably from 15° to 45°.
  • the tilt angle between the helix axis and the axis normal to the film plane is from 0 to 15°, very preferably from 0 to 5°.
  • 15 Planar alignment can be induced for example by providing an alignment layer on the substrate, for example a polyimide alignment layer, as described above.
  • Tilted alignment can be achieved for example by adding an alignment additive to the chiral RM mixture, or by using a substrate with a surface grating or pattern, e.g. a PB 20 grating.
  • the optical retardation ( ⁇ ) of a polymer film as a function of the wavelength of the i ncident beam ( ⁇ ) is given by the following equation (7): 25 ⁇ n ⁇ d)/ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ (7) ⁇ ⁇ w herein ( ⁇ n) is the birefringence of the film, (d) is the thickness of the film and ⁇ is the wavelength of the incident beam. 30
  • the birefringence and accordingly optical retardation depends on the thickness of a film and the tilt angle of optical axis in the film (cf. Berek’s compensator).
  • the birefringence ( ⁇ n) of the polymer film according to the present invention is p referably in the range from 0.1 to 0.8, more preferably from 0.2 to 0.7.
  • P24068 De - 138 - After photopolymerization, the resulting polymer film can be removed from the substrate and combined with other substrates or optical films by a laminating 5 process known by the skilled person. Suitable substrates and optical films are given above and include especially polarisers, in particular linear polarisers, photoalignment layers, or diffraction gratings, for example PB gratings.
  • T he polymer film according to the present invention has good adhesion to plastic 10 substrates, in particular to TAC, COP, and colour filters. Accordingly, it can be used as adhesive or base coating for subsequent polymerized RM layers or LC layers which otherwise would not well adhere to the substrates.
  • the polymer film of the present invention can also be used as alignment film or 15 substrate for other liquid-crystalline or RM materials.
  • the inventors have found that the polymer film obtainable from a RM formulation as described above and below, is in particular useful for multilayer applications due to its improved dewetting characteristics. In this way, stacks of optical films or preferably polymerized LC films can be prepared.
  • a preferred embodiment of the present invention relates to a process of preparing an optical element, comprising the steps of: A1) providing a first layer of an RM formulation according to the invention onto a substrate, preferably a substrate which has a surface grating or pattern, preferably 25 by a printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing, A2) removing any solvents present, A 3) optionally annealing the first RM layer (i.e., without solvents), preferably at a temperature where it is in the nematic or chiral nematic phase, A4) polymerising the RM layer, preferably by exposure to UV light, under an inert 30 atmosphere, B1) providing a second layer of an RM formulation according to the invention on to t he first layer, , preferably by a printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing, B2) removing any solvents present, B 3) optionally annealing the second RM layer (i.e., without solvents), preferably at a 35 temperature where it is in the
  • a third, fourth or further layers can be prepared by repeating process steps B1) to B4) using the same or a different RM formulation.
  • the RM formulation of the first layer and the RM formulation of the second layer are preferably different from each other.
  • the RM formulations used for preparation of the first and second layer respectively, contain different a mounts of a chiral compound(s) and/or contain chiral compounds with different 10 HTP. As a consequence, the helical pitch of the first and second layer will be different from each other.
  • an RM mixture or RM formulation containing a chiral dopant (chiral mixture) is blended with an RM mixture or RM formulation that does not contain a chiral compound (achiral mixture), which allows to easily vary the amount of the chiral dopant in the blend of the chiral and achiral mixture, and 15 thereby to easily adjust the helical pitch of the final layer and polymer film.
  • First and second layers can then be prepared from such RM mixtures or blended RM mixtures.
  • the RM mixture or formulation of the second layer contains a higher amount of the same chiral compound than the RM mixture or formulation of the first layer, and/or the RM mixture or formulation of the second layer contains a 20 chiral compound with a higher HTP than the RM mixture or formulation of the first layer.
  • the helical pitch in the first layer is longer than the helical pitch in the second layer.
  • This achiral RM host mixture can be used for the preparation of each individual layer.
  • Chiral RM mixtures for use in the first, second or further layers, respectively, are prepared by adding different amounts of 30 the same chiral compound to the RM host mixture, or by adding chiral compounds with differing HTP to the RM host mixture.
  • the invention further relates to an optical, electrooptical or electronic device or a component comprising an RM mixture or a polymer film as described above and 35 below.
  • P referred components include a PVH, diffraction grating, PBG or Bragg PG, lens, PB lens, optical waveguide, polarization beam splitter, quarter wave foil (QWF) or P24068 De - 140 - half wave foil (HWF), comprising a polymer film obtained from an RM formulation according to the present invention as described above and below.
  • QWF quarter wave foil
  • each feature disclosed is one example only of a generic series of equivalent or similar features. 30 All of the features disclosed in this specification may be combined in any combination, except combinations where at least some of such features and/or steps are mutually exclusive. In particular, the preferred features of the invention are applicable to all aspects of the invention and may be used in any combination. 35 Likewise, features described in non-essential combinations may be used separately (not in combination).
  • optical and electro optical data are measured at 20°C, unless expressly stated otherwise.
  • 35 "Clearing point” and “clearing temperature” mean the temperature of the transition from an LC phase into the isotropic phase.
  • P24068 De - 142 - Unless stated otherwise, the percentages of individual solid compounds in an RM mixture as described above and below refer to the total amount of solids in the 5 mixture, i.e., without any solvents.
  • all optical, electro-optical properties and physical parameters like birefringence, permittivity, electrical conductivity, electrical resistivity and sheet resistance, refer to a temperature of 20°C.
  • Example 1 To test the solubility and inkjet printing performance, the RM mixture R1 is formulated as follows: 20 25 25 30 59 35 P24068 De - 143 - M10a 5 -1-6a 10 T he RM mixture R1 is then dissolved in various organic solvents as shown in Table 1. The solubility of RM mixture R1 in the pure solvent is tested in concentration r anges from 5 to 30% by weight of solid content. The symbols indicate “o”- full 15 solubility, “-“cloudy solution, “x”-precipitation, and “xx” – not soluble.
  • Table 1 Solubility as a function of time and solid % of R1 S 20 Ti h 1 2 24 25 4 8 o o o o o S Ti h 30 1 2 24 4 8 o x x xx xx 35 Similar tests are carried out for other solvents. The results are shown in Table 2. T herein, the “o” symbol indicates achieved solubility of at least 15 wt% of RM mixture R1, while the other symbols indicate “x”-precipitation, and “xx” – not soluble. P24068 De - 144 - The values of the boiling point of the respective pure solvents are also given in Table 2. 5 T able 2: Solubility in pure solvents with at least 15 % solid content of R1 for 48 h.
  • Boiling point °C C 10 E M M p C M 15 T X P 3 B 20 F rom Tables 1 and 2 it can be seen that common organic solvents such as aromatic hydrocarbons and aromatic ethers do not dissolve the RM mixture R1 in the required concentration. While pure aliphatic ketones show high solubility of the tested RM mixture, they are not suitable for use in inkjet printing as a single solvent due to their low 25 boiling point (Tb ⁇ 180°C). From Table 2 it can also be seen that aromatic esters and alkyl esters of dicarboxylic a cids of formula S1 and S2 according to the present invention allow for more flexibility in the optimization of RM mixture solubility and boiling point.
  • a longer aliphatic group on the 30 ester (radical R S1-3 in formula S1 and S2) allows for an increase in boiling point, however, it reduces the solubility. It can also be seen that the optimum length is methyl or ethyl. For example, there is an increase in boiling point from methyl benzoate to hexyl benzoate but the solubility will be reduced. 35 When choosing solvents for inkjet printing formulations, further processing conditions h ave to be considered.
  • inkjet printing formulations with higher boiling point solvents allow for more stability, however, when processing the RM-containing thin films, t he solvents should be removed during annealing at 100 °C for up to 5 min, preferably P24068 De - 145 - up to 3 min at 80 °C. Therefore, for the inkjet printing tests, solvent mixtures containing cyclohexanone and the ester-type solvents of formula S1 and S2 are also used.
  • T able 3 shows a summary of the inkjet printing test using formulations of the RM mixture R1 dissolved at 15% by weight, either in pure cyclohexanone or pure 3- phenoxy toluene as comparison examples, or in a 27:73 solvent blend of cyclohexanone and the respective ester-type solvent according to the present 10 invention.
  • the symbol “o” indicates good jetting stability and good recovery
  • the symbol “-” indicates no or bad jetting stability
  • the symbol “x” indicates bad recovery.
  • “Recovery”, also sometimes referred to as “latency”, herein means that the formulation is kept idle in the ink-jet point head for a certain period of time.
  • RM formulations P24068 De - 146 - are printed onto a substrate, the solvent(s) removed, and the RM layer cured to form a polymer film by the following process: 5 T he films are printed with an LP50 PixDro printer onto a rubbed polyimide-coated glass substrate.
  • F ig.1a shows the stitched microscopic image of a polymer film prepared from the inkjet printed RM formulation R1 in pure cyclohexanone between 15 crossed polarizers (reference example).
  • FIG. 1b shows the stitched microscopic image of a polymer film prepared from the inkjet printed RM formulation R1 in the solvent blend cyclohexanone:3-PT 75:25 between crossed polarizers (reference example).
  • Fig.1c shows the stitched microscopic image of a polymer film prepared from the inkjet printed RM formulation R1 in the solvent blend c yclohexanone:ethyl benzoate 73:27 between crossed polarizers according to the present invention.
  • SD1 commercially available from Sigma (Merck)
  • RM Layer 1 coating step 30 Layer 1 formulation FR2A is spin-coated on the patterned SD1 layer at 2500rpm for 30s, - the spin-coated RM layer is then annealed at various temperatures and times, - the annealed RM layer is then cured using high-pressure mercury vapor lamp, 100mW cm -2 for various times at various temperatures.
  • RM Layer 2 coating step - Layer 2 formulation FR2B is spin coated directly on the cured RM Layer 1 at 900rpm for 30s, P24068 De - 149 - - the spin-coated RM layer is then annealed at various temperatures and times, - the annealed RM layer is then cured using high pressure mercury vapor lamp, 5 100mW cm-2 for various times at various temperatures.
  • the alignment quality of each RM layer is checked via microscopy. Good alignment is defined in that there are no defects present when checked via microscopy and that the film looks clear without haze by eye. If defects are present, then the 10 alignment quality is defined to be bad. F ig.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to polymerizable liquid crystal formulations (as a subcategory of liquid crystal material), especially to polymerizable ink formulations for inkjet printing, which are preferably PFAS-free (for enabling the reduction of perfluorocarbons and providing an environment friendly material), and which are comprising one or more polymerizable mesogenic compounds, also known as reactive mesogens (RMs), and one or more organic solvents selected from the group of aromatic ester and aromatic or aliphatic diester solvents, to polymers and polymer films obtained from such formulations, and to the use of the formulations, polymers and polymer films in optical or electrooptical components or devices, especially for digital optics or augmented reality or virtual reality (AR/VR) applications like polarizers, optical compensators, reflective films, diffraction or surface gratings, Bragg polarization gratings (Bragg PG), polarization volume gratings (PVG), polarization volume holograms (PVH), Pancharatnam Berry (PB) gratings, nonmechanical beam steering elements, optical waveguides, optical couplers, optical combiners, polarization beam splitters, partial mirrors, lenses or PB lenses.

Description

P24068 De - 1 - Polymerizable liquid crystal formulations 5 Field of the Invention The invention relates to polymerizable liquid crystal formulations (as a subcategory of liquid crystal material), especially to polymerizable ink formulations for inkjet printing, which are preferably PFAS-free (for enabling the reduction of 10 perfluorocarbons and providing an environment friendly material), and which are comprising one or more polymerizable mesogenic compounds, also known as reactive mesogens (RMs), and one or more organic solvents selected from the group of aromatic ester and aromatic or aliphatic diester solvents, to polymers and polymer films obtained from such formulations, and to the use of the formulations, 15 polymers and polymer films in optical or electrooptical components or devices, especially for digital optics or augmented reality or virtual reality (AR/VR) applications like polarizers, optical compensators, reflective films, diffraction or surface gratings, Bragg polarization gratings (Bragg PG), polarization volume gratings (PVG), polarization volume holograms (PVH), Pancharatnam Berry (PB) 20 gratings, nonmechanical beam steering elements, optical waveguides, optical couplers, optical combiners, polarization beam splitters, partial mirrors, lenses or PB lenses. Background and Prior Art 25 Reactive mesogens (RMs) or polymerizable liquid crystals combine the properties of liquid crystals and polymers. RMs can be used for the preparation of functional films or coatings with adjustable refractive indices, polarization, and surface alignment. These materials can be applied to waveguides or optics in augmented reality (AR) 30 displays to enhance performance, image quality, field of view, and overall user experience. Furthermore, the polymerized RMs can form thin films with high birefringence that can be integrated into flexible, lightweight devices. The quality of the RM layer is essential for the visual quality as well as device performance. 35 Inkjet printing (IJP) is one of the most promising methods for the deposition of RM materials from solution. To use formulation in inkjet printing, several requirements such as jettability, stability (shelf life), and process compatibility must be satisfied. Solvent selection has a particular influence on the parameters of the formulation and P24068 De - 2 - often determines whether a formulation is suitable for use in inkjet printing. In the case of RM formulations, additional requirements related to liquid crystal alignment 5 are also essential. In prior art, typical solvents proposed for use in RM formulations are selected from low boiling point ketones, alcohols, glycols, or their esters. Among aromatic compounds, toluene and xylene are also often mentioned. 10 However, the solvent selection has a particular influence on the parameters of the formulation and often determines whether a formulation is suitable for use in inkjet printing or not. In many cases, solvents that are suitable for inkjet printing have poor solubility of the solute or are not suitable for further processing conditions and vice 15 versa. Moreover, when producing multilayer optical elements where multiple RM layers are deposited directly onto each other, it is important to ensure good and uniform alignment quality, prevent the underlying RM layer from damage when depositing the next RM 20 layer on top of it, and enable strong intermolecular interactions between the RM layers to impart the alignment direction from one RM layer to the next RM layer. At the same time, it should be avoided that the solvents used in the formulation for depositing the second RM layer onto the first RM layer may cause damage to the first layer or allow migration of individual components of the second RM formulation into the first layer. 25 It is therefore desirable to provide RM formulations which are especially suitable for use as printing inks, and which enable good solubility of the RMs and show further advantageous properties like good jettability, high jetting stability, long shelf life and good process compatibility for standard printing processes, especially inkjet printing, 30 which avoid damage to cured RM layers used as substrates, and which can also be used in large scale production. It is an aim of the present invention to provide RM formulations which show one or more of the above-mentioned advantages. Other aims of the present invention are 35 immediately evident to the person skilled in the art from the following detailed description. P24068 De - 3 - Surprisingly, the inventors of the present invention have found that these aims could be achieved by providing RM formulations according to the invention as described 5 and claimed hereinafter. Thus, the inventors of the present invention have surprisingly found that by using the solvents and solvent blends in combination with the RMs according to the present invention as described hereinafter, it is possible to obtain formulations which show 10 one or more of optimum solubility, good jetting properties, high stability, suitable processing window and good process compatibility, and allow tuning of the parameters needed for inkjet printing. While these RM formulations are especially suitable for inkjet printing, they can also be used for other printing or coating methods as described below. 15 Summary of the invention The present invention relates to a formulation (hereinafter also referred to as "RM formulation") comprising a polymerizable mesogenic compound (hereinafter also 20 referred to as "reactive mesogen” or “RM”) or a mixture of two or more polymerizable mesogenic compounds (hereinafter also referred to as “RM mixture”) and further comprising a solvent or a solvent blend of two or more solvents, wherein the formulation comprises at least one first solvent selected from formulae S1 and S2 25 ArS1-(CH2)a-ZS1-RS1 S1 RS2-ZS2-XS-ZS3-RS3 S2 30 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings ArS1 aryl or heteroaryl with 5 or 6 ring atoms, which optionally contains one or two hetero atoms selected from N, O and S, preferably phenyl, and which is 35 optionally substituted by one or more groups LS, ZS1-3 -CO-O- or -O-CO-, P24068 De - 4 - XS ArS2 or (CH2)b, 5 ArS2 arylene or heteroarylene with 5 or 6 ring atoms, which optionally contains one or two hetero atoms selected from N, O and S, preferably 1,2- phenylene, 1,3-phenylene or 1,4-phenylene, and which is optionally substituted by one or more groups LS, 10 LS F, Cl, or optionally halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 5 C atoms, preferably alkyl with 1 to 5 C-atoms, RS1-S3 alkyl with 1 to 8, preferably 1 to 6, C atoms, very preferably methyl, ethyl, 15 propyl or butyl, most preferably methyl or ethyl, a 0 or 1, b 3, 4, 5 or 6, preferably 4. 20 The invention further relates to an RM formulation as described above and below, which further comprises one or more additives, preferably selected from the group consisting of polymerization initiators, surfactants, stabilisers, catalysts, sensitizers, inhibitors, chain-transfer agents, co-reacting monomers, reactive thinners, surface- 25 active compounds, lubricating agents, wetting agents, dispersing agents, hydrophobing agents, adhesive agents, flow improvers, degassing or defoaming agents, deaerators, diluents, reactive diluents, auxiliaries, colourants, dyes, pigments and nanoparticles. 30 The invention further relates to a polymer or polymer film obtainable or obtained from an RM formulation as described above and below. The invention further relates to a process of preparing a polymer or polymer film from an RM formulation containing an RM or RM mixture and a solvent or solvent 35 blend as described above and below, comprising the steps of depositing a layer of the RM formulation onto a substrate, preferably removing the solvents, optionally annealing the layer, and polymerizing the RM or RM mixture, preferably at a temperature where it exhibits a liquid crystal phase, and wherein the RM formulation P24068 De - 5 - is preferably deposited onto the substrate by a printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing. 5 The invention further relates to the use of the RM formulation, polymer or polymer film as described above and below in optical, electrooptical or electronic components or devices. 10 The invention further relates to an optical, electrooptical or electronic device or a component comprising an RM formulation, polymer or polymer film as described above and below. Said components include, without limitation, optical retardation films like quarter 15 wave foils (QWF) or half wave foils (HWF), polarizers, optical compensators, reflective films, diffraction or surface gratings such as Bragg polarization gratings (Bragg PG), polarization volume gratings (PVG), polarization volume holograms (PVH), Pancharatnam Berry (PB) gratings, furthermore nonmechanical beam steering elements, optical waveguides, optical couplers or combiners, polarization 20 beam splitters, partial mirrors, reflective films, alignment layers, colour filters, antistatic protection sheets, electromagnetic interference protection sheets, lenses for light guides, focusing and optical effects, polarization controlled lenses, PB lenses and IR reflection films; for example for use in LC displays (LCDs), organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs), autostereoscopic 3D displays, see-through near-eye 25 displays, augmented reality( AR) or virtual reality (VR) systems, switchable windows, spatial light modulators, optical data storage, remote optical sensing, holography, spectroscopy, optical telecommunications, polarimetry or front/back- lighting. 30 Said devices include, without limitation, electro optical displays, especially LCDs, OLEDs, autostereoscopic 3D displays, see-through near-eye displays, AR/VR systems, goggles for AR/VR applications, switchable windows, spatial light modulators, optical data storage devices, optical sensors, holographic devices, spectrometers, optical telecommunication systems, polarimeters or front-/backlights. 35 Detailed Description of the Drawings P24068 De - 6 - Fig.1a-c (x2 magnification) show stitched microscopic images between crossed polarizers of polymer films prepared from inkjet-printed RM formulations according 5 to the invention and of reference RM formulations as described in Example 1. Fig. 2 (x100 magnification) shows a microscopic image between crossed polarizers of a polymer film prepared from an inkjet-printed RM formulation according to the invention as described in Example 2. 10 Definitions of Terms Throughout the description and claims of this specification, the words “comprise” and “contain” and variations of the words, for example “comprising” and “comprises”, 15 mean “including but not limited to”, and are not intended to (and do not) exclude other components. Unless the context clearly indicates otherwise, as used herein plural forms of the terms herein are to be construed as including the singular form and vice versa. 20 The term "film" as used herein includes rigid or flexible, self-supporting or free- standing films with mechanical stability, as well as coatings or layers on a supporting substrate or between two substrates. 25 As used herein, the terms "reactive mesogen" and "RM" will be understood to mean a compound containing a mesogenic or liquid crystalline skeleton, and one or more functional groups attached thereto, optionally via spacer groups, which are suitable for polymerization and are also referred to as "polymerizable group" or "P". 30 Unless stated otherwise, the term "polymerizable compound" as used herein will be understood to mean a polymerizable monomeric compound. Polymerizable compounds or RMs with one polymerizable group are also referred to as "monoreactive" compounds, polymerizable compounds or RMs with two 35 polymerizable groups as "direactive" compounds, and polymerizable compounds or RMs with more than two polymerizable groups as "multireactive" compounds. Compounds without a polymerizable group are also referred to as "non-reactive" compounds. P24068 De - 7 - The terms "liquid crystal", "mesogen" and "mesogenic compound" as used herein 5 mean a compound that under suitable conditions of temperature, pressure and concentration can exist as a mesophase or in particular as a LC phase. The term “clearing point” means the temperature at which the transition between the mesophase with the highest temperature range and the isotropic phase occurs. 10 The term "mesogenic group" as used herein is known to the person skilled in the art and described in the literature, and means a group which, due to the anisotropy of its attracting and repelling interactions, essentially contributes to causing a liquid- crystal (LC) phase in low-molecular-weight or polymeric substances. Compounds 15 containing mesogenic groups (mesogenic compounds) do not necessarily have to have an LC phase themselves. It is also possible for mesogenic compounds to exhibit LC phase behaviour only after mixing with other compounds and/or after polymerization. Typical mesogenic groups are, for example, rigid rod- or disc- shaped units. An overview of the terms and definitions used in connection with 20 mesogenic or LC compounds is given in Pure Appl. Chem.2001, 73(5), 888 and C. Tschierske, G. Pelzl, S. Diele, Angew. Chem. 2004, 116, 6340-6368. The term "spacer group", hereinafter also referred to as "Sp", as used herein is known to the person skilled in the art and is described in the literature, see, for 25 example, Pure Appl. Chem. 2001, 73(5), 888 and C. Tschierske, G. Pelzl, S. Diele, Angew. Chem.2004, 116, 6340-6368. As used herein, the terms "spacer group" or "spacer" mean a flexible group, for example an alkylene group, which connects the mesogenic group and the polymerizable group(s) in a polymerizable mesogenic compound. 30 As used herein, the term "RM formulation" means a formulation comprising at least one RM or an RM mixture, and further comprising one or more solvents, preferably selected from organic solvents, as described above and below. 35 As used herein, the term "RM mixture" means a mixture comprising one or more, preferably two or more, more preferably two to ten, very preferably two to six RMs, The RM mixture optionally further comprises one or more solid additives including, without P24068 De - 8 - being limited to, polymerization initiators, inhibitors, surfactants and adhesion promoters, etc. as described in more detail below. 5 Unless stated otherwise, the percentage of a compound in an RM mixture as given above and below means % by weight of all solids in the RM mixture. Unless stated otherwise, the percentage of a compound in an RM formulation as given 10 above and below means % by weight of all solids in the RM formulation, including liquid additives as described below but excluding solvents. The Hansen Solubility Parameters (HSP) (see Hansen Solubility Parameters: A User’s Handbook, Second Edition, C. M. Hansen (2007), Taylor and Francis Group, LLC 15 (HSPiP manual) can be used for making a rough estimate if and to what amount a material (the solute) can be dissolved in another material (the solvent) to form a homogeneous solution. Therein, each molecule is defined by the following three HSPs [in MPa0.5], as also used herein: 20 ^D refers to the energy from dispersion (non-polar) forces between molecules ^P refers to the energy from dipolar intermolecular forces between molecules ^H refers to the energy from hydrogen bonds between molecules The Hansen Solubility Parameters can be determined according to the Hansen Solubility 25 Parameters in Practice (HSPiP) program (2nd edition) as supplied by Hanson and Abbot et al. The HSP values as given above and below refer to 25°C. The term “per- and/or polyfluoroalkyl substance (PFAS)” as used herein (following the definition by the OECD) means a substance or compound that contains at least 30 one fully fluorinated methyl or methylene C atom (without any H/Cl/Br/I atom attached to it), i.e., a compound with at least one CF3 or CF2 group. The expression “polyfluorinated alkyl or aryl group” as used herein means an alkyl or aryl group which is substituted by two or more F atoms (wherein the F atoms may 35 be attached either to the same or different C atoms), thus including perfluorocarbon groups. P24068 De - 9 - As used herein, the term "polymer" will be understood to mean a molecule that encompasses a backbone of one or more distinct types of repeating units (the 5 smallest constitutional unit of the molecule) and is inclusive of the commonly known terms “oligomer”, “copolymer”, “homopolymer” and the like. Further, it will be understood that the term polymer is inclusive of, in addition to the polymer itself, residues from initiators, catalysts, and other elements attendant to the synthesis of such a polymer, where such residues are understood as not being covalently 10 incorporated thereto. Further, such residues and other elements, while normally removed during post-polymerization purification processes, are typically mixed or co-mingled with the polymer such that they generally remain with the polymer when it is transferred between vessels or between solvents or dispersion media. 15 The term “polymerization” means the chemical process to form a polymer by bonding together multiple polymerizable groups or polymer precursors (polymerizable compounds) containing such polymerizable groups. A “polymer network” is a network in which all polymer chains are interconnected to 20 form a single macroscopic entity by many crosslinks. The polymer network can occur in the following types: - A graft polymer molecule is a branched polymer molecule in which one or more the side chains are different, structurally or configurationally, from the main 25 chain. - A star polymer molecule is a branched polymer molecule in which a single branch point gives rise to multiple linear chains or arms. If the arms are identical, the star polymer molecule is said to be regular. If adjacent arms are composed of different repeating subunits, the star polymer molecule is said to 30 be variegated. - A comb polymer molecule consists of a main chain with two or more three-way branch points and linear side chains. If the arms are identical the comb polymer molecule is said to be regular. - A brush polymer molecule consists of a main chain with linear, unbranched side 35 chains and where one or more of the branch points has four-way functionality or larger. P24068 De - 10 - The term “chiral” in general is used to describe an object that is non-superimposable on its mirror image. 5 “Achiral” (non- chiral) objects are objects that are identical to their mirror image. The terms “chiral nematic” and “cholesteric” are used synonymously in this application, unless explicitly stated otherwise. 10 The term “isomerizable / photoisomerizable compound” means a compound comprising one or more isomerizable or photoisomerizable groups, respectively. The term “isomerizable group” means a functional group of a molecule that causes a 15 change of the geometry of the molecule, i.e. isomerization, either by bond rotation, skeletal rearrangement or atom- or group- transfer, or by dimerization, which can be induced, e.g., thermally or photochemically or by adding a catalyst. The term “photoisomerizable group” means a functional group of a molecule that 20 causes a change of the geometry of the molecule, i.e. isomerization, either by bond rotation, skeletal rearrangement or atom- or group- transfer, or by dimerization, upon irradiation with light of a suitable wavelength that can be absorbed by the molecule (photoisomerization). 25 Examples of photoisomerizable groups are -C=C- double bonds and azo groups (- N=N-). Examples of molecular structures and sub-structures comprising such photoisomerizable groups are stilbene, (1,2-difluoro-2-phenyl-vinyl)-benzene, cinnamate, ^-cyanocinnamate, 4-phenylbut-3-en-2-one, Schiff base (i.e., a group RiRiiC=NRiii, wherein Riii is different from H, and is for example alkyl or aryl), 2- 30 benzyliden-1-indanone, chalcone, coumarin, chromone, pentalenone and azobenzene. A chiral RM formulation in accordance with the present invention can be prepared, for example, by doping a host mixture comprising one or more RMs with a chiral 35 compound having a high twisting power. The pitch p (in nm) of the induced cholesteric helix, hereinafter also referred to as “chiral pitch” or “helical pitch” is then given by the concentration c (in %) and the P24068 De - 11 - helical twisting power HTP (in nm-1) of the chiral compound in accordance with the following equation: 5 p = (HTP c)-1 A low value of the pitch is hereinafter also referred to as “short pitch”, and a high value of the pitch is hereinafter also referred to as “long pitch”. Also, a short pitch 10 corresponds to a highly twisted structure, i.e., a higher twist angle, and a long pitch corresponds to a slowly twisted structure, i.e., a lower twist angle, around the helix axis within a given distance. The twist angle, θ through a thickness, d, is defined by the following equation: 15 (360 ∗ ^) where p is the pitch as defined above. In case more than one chiral compound is used, the total HTP of the chiral 20 compounds having the same configuration or twist sense (HTPtotal) holds then approximately the following equation: HTPtotal = ∑i ci HTPi 25 wherein ci is the concentration of each individual chiral compound and HTPi is the helical twisting power of each individual chiral compound. The HTP of all chiral compounds within a mixture of different configurations or different twist sense (IHTP^I) holds then approximately the following equation: 30 IHTP^ I = (∑s cs HTPs) – ((∑rcr HTPr) wherein cs is the concentration of each individual chiral compound with S configuration, HTPs is the helical twisting power of each individual chiral compound 35 having S configuration and wherein cr is the concentration of each individual chiral compound with R configuration and HTPR is the helical twisting power of each individual chiral compound having R configuration. The birefringence ^n is defined as follows P24068 De - 12 - ^n = ne -no 5 wherein ne is the extraordinary refractive index and no is the ordinary refractive index, and the effective average refractive index nav. is given by the following equation: 10 nav. = ((2no2 + ne2)/3) ½ The average refractive index nav. and the ordinary refractive index no can be measured using an Abbe refractometer. ^n can then be calculated from the above equations. 15 The central wavelength ^ and bandwidth ^^ of a reflectance band of cholesteric RM or LC material or a cholesteric polymer film are given by the pitch p of the cholesteric helix, the average refractive index nav. and the birefringence ^n of the cholesteric liquid crystal in accordance with the following equations: 20 ^ = nav. . p ^^^^^^n . p 25 The term “visible light” means electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength in a range from about 400 nm to about 740 nm. “Ultraviolet (UV) light” means electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength in a range from about 200 nm to about 450 nm. 30 According to the present application, the term "linearly polarised light" means light, which is at least partially linearly polarized. Preferably, the aligning light is linearly polarized with a degree of polarization of more than 5:1. Wavelengths, intensity and energy of the linearly polarised light are chosen depending on the photosensitivity of the photoalignable material. Typically, the wavelengths are in the UV-A, UV-B 35 and/or UV-C range or in the visible range. Preferably, the linearly polarised light comprises light of wavelengths less than 450 nm, more preferably less than 420 nm at the same time the linearly polarised light preferably comprises light of P24068 De - 13 - wavelengths longer than 280nm, preferably more than 320nm, more preferably over 350nm. 5 The Irradiance (Ee) or radiation power is defined as the power of electromagnetic radiation (d^^ per unit area (dA) incident on a surface: Ee = d^/dA. 10 The radiant exposure or radiation dose (He), is as the irradiance or radiation power (Ee) per time (t): He = Ee ∙ t. 15 On the molecular level, the birefringence of a liquid crystal depends on the anisotropy of the polarizability (^α=αװ-α┴). "Polarisability" means the ease with which the electron distribution in the atom or molecule can be distorted. The polarizability increases with greater number of electrons and a more diffuse electron cloud. The 20 polarizability can be calculated using a method described in e.g. Jap. J. Appl. Phys. 42, (2003) p.3463. The "optical retardation" at a given wavelength R(^) (in nm) of a layer of liquid crystalline or birefringent material is defined as the product of birefringence at that 25 wavelength ^n(^) and layer thickness d (in nm) according to the following equation: R(^) = ^n(^) . d The optical retardation R represents the difference in the optical path lengths in 30 nanometres travelled by S-polarised and P-polarised light whilst passing through the birefringent material. "On-axis" retardation means the retardation at normal incidence to the sample surface. The retardation (R(^)) of a material can be measured using a spectroscopic 35 ellipsometer, for example the M2000 spectroscopic ellipsometer manufactured by J. A. Woollam Co. This instrument can measure the optical retardance in nanometres of a birefringent sample e.g., Quartz over a range of wavelengths typically, 370nm to P24068 De - 14 - 2000nm. From this data it is possible to calculate the dispersion (R(450)/R(550) or ^n(450)/^n(550)) of a material. 5 A method for carrying out these measurements was presented at the National Physics Laboratory (London, UK) by N. Singh in October 2006 and entitled “Spectroscopic Ellipsometry, Part1-Theory and Fundamentals, Part 2 – Practical Examples and Part 3 - measurements”. In accordance with the measurement 10 procedures described Retardation Measurement (RetMeas) Manual (2002) and Guide to WVASE (2002) (Woollam Variable Angle Spectroscopic Ellipsometer) published by J. A. Woollam Co. Inc (Lincoln, NE, USA). Unless stated otherwise, this method is used to determine the retardation of the materials, films and devices described in this invention. 15 The term "director" is known in prior art and means the preferred orientation direction of the long molecular axes (in case of calamitic compounds) or short molecular axes (in case of discotic compounds) of the liquid-crystalline or RM molecules. In case of uniaxial ordering of such anisotropic molecules, the director is 20 the axis of anisotropy. The term “alignment” or “orientation” relates to alignment (orientational ordering) of anisotropic units of material such as small molecules or fragments of big molecules in a common direction named “alignment direction”. In an aligned layer of liquid- 25 crystalline or RM material the liquid-crystalline director coincides with the alignment direction so that the alignment direction corresponds to the direction of the anisotropy axis of the material. The terms "uniform orientation" or "uniform alignment" of a liquid-crystalline or RM 30 material, for example in a layer of the material, mean that the long molecular axes (in case of calamitic compounds) or the short molecular axes (in case of discotic compounds) of the liquid-crystalline or RM molecules are oriented substantially in the same direction. In other words, the lines of liquid-crystalline director are parallel. 35 The terms "homeotropic structure / alignment / orientation" refer to a film wherein the optical axis is substantially perpendicular to the film plane. P24068 De - 15 - The terms "planar structure /alignment / orientation" refer to a film wherein the optical axis is substantially parallel to the film plane. 5 All temperatures, such as, for example, the melting point T(C,N) or T(C,S), the transition from the smectic (S) to the nematic (N) phase T(S,N) and the clearing point T(N,I) of the liquid crystals, are quoted in degrees Celsius. All temperature differences are quoted in differential degrees. 10 In case of doubt the definitions as given in C. Tschierske, G. Pelzl and S. Diele, Angew. Chem.2004, 116, 6340-6368 shall apply. If in the formulae shown above and below a group R, including any variations 15 thereof such as R1, R0, R00, R0*, R11, R*, R**, RC, R3, R4 etc., or L denotes an alkyl radical and/or an alkoxy radical, this may be straight-chain or branched. It is preferably straight-chain, has 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 C atoms and accordingly preferably denotes ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy, hexyloxy or heptyloxy, furthermore methyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, 20 tridecyl, tetradecyl, pentadecyl, methoxy, octyloxy, nonyloxy, decyloxy, undecyloxy, dodecyloxy, tridecyloxy or tetradecyloxy. If in the formulae shown above and below a group R including any variations thereof such as R1, R0, R00, R*0, R11, R22, RC, R3, R4 etc., or L denotes an alkyl radical 25 and/or an alkoxy radical, this may be straight-chain or branched. It is preferably straight-chain, has 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 C atoms and accordingly preferably denotes ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy, hexyloxy or heptyloxy, furthermore methyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, tetradecyl, pentadecyl, methoxy, octyloxy, nonyloxy, decyloxy, undecyloxy, 30 dodecyloxy, tridecyloxy or tetradecyloxy. If in the formulae shown above and below a group R including any variations thereof such as R1, R0, R00, R0*, R11, R22, RC, R3, R4etc., or L denotes an alkyl radical wherein one or more CH2 groups are replaced by S, this may be straight-chain or 35 branched. It is preferably straight-chain, has 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 C atoms and accordingly preferably denotes thiomethyl, thioethyl, thiopropyl, thiobutyl, thiopentyl, thiohexyl or thioheptyl. P24068 De - 16 - Oxaalkyl preferably denotes straight-chain 2-oxapropyl (= methoxymethyl), 2-oxabutyl (= ethoxymethyl) or 3-oxabutyl (= 2-methoxyethyl), 2-, 3- or 4-oxapentyl, 5 2-, 3-, 4- or 5-oxahexyl, 2-, 3-, 4-, 5- or 6-oxaheptyl, 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-oxaoctyl, 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7- or 8-oxanonyl, 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8- or 9-oxadecyl. If in the formulae shown above and below a group R including any variations thereof such as R1, R0, R00, R*0, R11, R22, RC, R3, R4 etc., or L denotes an alkoxy or oxaalkyl 10 group it may also contain one or more additional oxygen atoms, provided that oxygen atoms are not linked directly to one another. In another preferred embodiment, one or more of R including any variations thereof such as R1, R0, R00, R*0, R11, R22, RC, R3, R4 etc., or L are selected from the group 15 consisting of , , 20 , -S , , , H, C1-12-alkyl or C2-12-alkenyl, and very preferably are selected from the group consisting of 25 30 , 35 , , . P24068 De - 17 - -OCH2OCH3, -O(CH2)2OCH3, -O(CH2)3OCH3, -O(CH2)4OCH3, -O(CH2)2F, -O(CH2)3F and -O(CH2)4F. 5 If in the formulae shown above and below a group R including any variations thereof such as R1, R0, R00, R*0, R11, R22, RC, R3, R4 etc., or L denotes an alkyl radical in which one CH2 group has been replaced by -CH=CH-, this may be straight-chain or branched. It is preferably straight-chain and has 2 to 10 C atoms. Accordingly, it 10 denotes, in particular, vinyl, prop-1- or -2-enyl, but-1-, -2- or -3-enyl, pent-1-, -2-, -3- or -4-enyl, hex-1-, -2-, -3-, -4- or -5-enyl, hept-1-, -2-, -3-, -4-, -5- or - 6-enyl, oct-1-, -2-, -3-, -4-, -5-, -6- or -7-enyl, non-1-, -2-, -3-, -4-, -5-, -6-, -7- or -8- enyl, dec-1-, -2-, -3-, -4-, -5-, -6-, -7-, -8- or -9-enyl. 15 If in the formulae shown above and below a group R including any variations thereof such as R1, R0, R00, R*0, R11, R22, RC, R3, R4 etc., or L denotes an alkyl or alkenyl radical which is at least monosubstituted by halogen, this radical is preferably straight-chain, and halogen is preferably F or Cl. In the case of polysubstitution, halogen is preferably F. The resultant radicals also include perfluorinated radicals. In 20 the case of monosubstitution, the fluorine or chlorine substituent may be in any desired position, but is preferably in the ^-position. Above and below, or denotes a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene 25 ring, and denotes a 1,4-phenylene ring. Halogen is preferably F or Cl, very preferably F. 30 The group -CR0=CR00- is preferably -CH=CH-. -OC-, -CO-, -C(=O)- and -C(O)- denote a carbonyl group, i.e. . Preferred substituents L, are, for example, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO2, -NCO, -NCS, - 35 OCN, -SCN, -C(=O)N(Rx)2, -C(=O)Y1, -C(=O)Rx, -N(Rx)2, straight-chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy each having 1 to 25 C atoms, in which one or more H atoms may optionally be replaced by F or Cl, optionally substituted silyl having 1 to 20 Si atoms, or optionally P24068 De - 18 - substituted aryl having 6 to 25, preferably 6 to 15, C atoms, wherein Rx denotes H, F, Cl, CN, or straight chain, branched or cyclic alkyl having 1 5 to 25 C atoms, wherein one or more non-adjacent CH2-groups are optionally replaced by -O-, -S-, -CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O- in such a manner that O- and/or S-atoms are not directly connected with each other, and wherein one or more H atoms are each optionally replaced by F, Cl, P- or P-Sp-, and Y1 denotes halogen. 10 Particularly preferred substituents L are, for example, F, Cl, CN, NO2, CH3, C2H5, OCH3, SCH3, OC2H5, SC2H5, COCH3, COC2H5, COOCH3, COOC2H5, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, OC2F5, furthermore phenyl. (L) L L L L , 15 in which L has one of the meanings indicated above. 20 . Throughout the application, the term “aryl and heteroaryl groups” encompass 25 groups, which can be monocyclic or polycyclic, i.e. they can have one ring (such as, for example, phenyl) or two or more rings, which may also be fused (such as, for example, naphthyl) or covalently linked (such as, for example, biphenyl), or contain a combination of fused and linked rings. Heteroaryl groups contain one or more heteroatoms, preferably selected from O, N, S and Se. Particular preference is given 30 to mono-, bi- or tricyclic aryl groups having 6 to 25 C atoms and mono-, bi- or tricyclic heteroaryl groups having 2 to 25 C atoms, which optionally contain fused rings, and which are optionally substituted. Preference is furthermore given to 5-, 6- or 7-membered aryl and heteroaryl groups, in which, in addition, one or more CH groups may be replaced by N, S or O in such a way that O atoms and/or S atoms 35 are not linked directly to one another. Preferred aryl groups are, for example, phenyl, biphenyl, terphenyl, [1,1':3',1'']¬¬terphenyl-2'-yl, naphthyl, anthracene, binaphthyl, phenanthrene, pyrene, dihydropyrene, chrysene, perylene, tetracene, pentacene, benzopyrene, fluorene, indene, indenofluorene, spirobifluorene, more P24068 De - 19 - preferably 1,4-phenylene, 4,4’-biphenylene, 1, 4-terphenylene. 5 Preferred heteroaryl groups are, for example, 5 membered rings, such as pyrrole, pyrazole, imidazole, 1,2,3-triazole, 1,2,4-triazole, tetrazole, furan, thiophene, selenophene, oxazole, isoxazole, 1,2 thiazole, 1,3-thiazole, 1,2,3-oxadiazole, 1,2,4 oxadiazole, 1,2,5-oxadiazole, 1,3,4-oxadiazole, 1,2,3-thiadiazole, 1,2,4-thiadiazole, 1,2,5-thiadiazole, 1,3,4-thiadiazole, 6 membered rings, such as pyridine, pyridazine, 10 pyrimidine, pyrazine, 1,3,5-triazine, 1,2,4-triazine, 1,2,3-triazine, 1,2,4,5-tetrazine, 1,2,3,4-tetrazine, 1,2,3,5-tetrazine, or condensed groups, such as indole, iso-indole, indolizine, indazole, benzimidazole, benzotriazole, purine, naphthimidazole, phenanthrimidazole, pyridimidazole, pyrazinimidazole, quinoxalinimidazole, benzoxazole, naphthoxazole, anthroxazole, phen-anthroxazole, isoxazole, 15 benzothiazole, benzofuran, isobenzofuran, dibenzofuran, quinoline, isoquinoline, pteridine, benzo-5,6-quinoline, benzo-6,7-quinoline, benzo-7,8-quinoline, benzoisoquinoline, acridine, phenothiazine, phenoxazine, benzopyridazine, benzopyrimidine, quinoxaline, phenazine, naphthyridine, azacarbazole, benzocarboline, phenanthridine, phenanthroline, thieno[2,3b]thiophene, 20 thieno[3,2b]-thiophene, dithienothiophene, isobenzothiophene, dibenzothiophene, benzothiadiazothiophene, or combinations of these groups. The heteroaryl groups may also be substituted by alkyl, alkoxy, thioalkyl, fluorine, fluoroalkyl or further aryl or heteroaryl groups. 25 In a g oup the single bond shown between the two ring atoms can be attached to any free position of the benzene ring. -OC-, -CO-, -C(=O)- and -C(O)- denote a carbonyl group, i.e. . 30 The polymerizable group P, including any variations thereof such as P0, P1, P2, P*0, is a group which is suitable for a polymerization reaction, such as, for example, free- radical or ionic chain polymerization, polyaddition or polycondensation, or for a polymer-analogous reaction, for example addition or condensation onto a main 35 polymer chain. Particular preference is given to groups for chain polymerization, in particular those containing a C=C double bond or -C^C- triple bond, and groups which are suitable for polymerization with ring opening, such as, for example, oxetane or epoxide groups. P24068 De - 20 - Preferred groups P, including any variations thereof such as P0, P1, P2, P*0, are 5 selected from the group consisting of CH2=CW1-CO-O-, CH2=CW1-CO-, - , O 7 W 10 N O O 8 (CH ) C O 15 C H-, C OCN- and W4W5W6Si-, in which W1 denotes H, F, Cl, CN, CF3, phenyl or alkyl having 1 to 5 C atoms, in particular H, F, Cl or CH3, W2 and W3 each, independently of one another, denote H or alkyl having 1 to 5 C atoms, in particular H, methyl, ethyl or 20 n-propyl, W4, W5 and W6 each, independently of one another, denote Cl, oxaalkyl or oxacarbonylalkyl having 1 to 5 C atoms, W7 and W8 each, independently of one another, denote H, Cl or alkyl having 1 to 5 C atoms, Phe denotes 1,4-phenylene, which is optionally substituted by one or more radicals L as defined above which are other than P-Sp-, k1, k2 and k3 each, independently of one another, denote 0 or 1, k3 25 preferably denotes 1, and k4 denotes an integer from 1 to 10. Very preferred groups P, including any variations thereof such as P0, P1, P2, P*0, are sel t d f th i ti f 30 C 2-, 35 C (C (CH2=CH-CH2)2N-, (CH2=CH-CH2)2N-CO-, CH2=CW1-CO-NH-, P24068 De - 21 - CH2=CH-(COO)k1-Phe-(O)k2-, CH2=CH-(CO)k1-Phe-(O)k2-, Phe-CH=CH- and W4W5W6Si-, in which W1 denotes H, F, Cl, CN, CF3, phenyl or alkyl having 1 to 5 C 5 atoms, in particular H, F, Cl or CH3, W2 and W3 each, independently of one another, denote H or alkyl having 1 to 5 C atoms, in particular H, methyl, ethyl or n-propyl, W4, W5 and W6 each, independently of one another, denote Cl, oxaalkyl or oxa- carbonylalkyl having 1 to 5 C atoms, W7 and W8 each, independently of one another, denote H, Cl or alkyl having 1 to 5 C atoms, Phe denotes 1,4-phenylene, k1, k2 and k3 10 each, independently of one another, denote 0 or 1, k3 preferably denotes 1, and k4 denotes an integer from 1 to 10. Very particularly preferred groups P, including any variations thereof such as P0, P1, P2, P*0, are selected from the group consisting of CH2=CW1-CO-O-, in particular 15 CH =CH CO O CH =C CH CO O d CH =CF CO O f th CH =CH-O-, (C nd W 20 Further preferred polymerizable groups P, including any variations thereof such as P0, P1, P2, P*0, are selected from the group consisting of vinyloxy, acrylate, methacrylate, fluoroacrylate, chloroacrylate, oxetane and epoxide, most preferably from acrylate and methacrylate. 25 In another preferred embodiment of the invention, in a polymerizable compound as disclosed above and below, including compounds of formule D, M, T, A, I* and their subformulae, all polymerizable groups have the same meaning, and preferably denote acrylate or methacrylate, very preferably acrylate. 30 The spacer group, including any variations thereof such as Sp0, Sp1, Sp2, Sp*0, when being different from a single bond, is preferably of the formula Sp"-X", so that the respective radical P-Sp- etc. conforms to the formula P-Sp"-X"-, wherein 35 Sp" denotes linear or branched alkylene having 1 to 20, preferably 1 to 12, C atoms, which is optionally mono- or polysubstituted by F, Cl, Br, I or CN and in which, in addition, one or more non-adjacent CH2 groups may each be replaced, independently of one another, by -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N(R0)-, -Si(R0R00)-, P24068 De - 22 - -CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -S-CO-, -CO-S-, -N(R00)-CO-O-, -O-CO- N n such a way that O and/or S 5 at y , X" denotes -O-, -S-, -CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-N(R0)-, -N(R0)-CO-, - N(R0)-CO-N(R00)-, -OCH2-, -CH2O-, -SCH2-, -CH2S-, -CF2O-, -OCF2-, -CF2S-, - SCF2-, -CF2CH2-, -CH2CF2-, -CF2CF2-, -CH=N-, -N=CH-, -N=N-, -CH=CR0-, - 10 CY2=CY3-, -C^C-, -CH=CH-CO-O-, -O-CO-CH=CH- or a single bond, R0 and R00 each, independently of one another, denote H or alkyl having 1 to 20 C atoms, and 15 Y2 and Y3 each, independently of one another, denote H, F, Cl or CN. X" is preferably -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -O-COO-, -CO-NR0-, -NR0- CO-, -NR0-CO-NR00- or a single bond. 20 Typical spacer groups Sp, including any variations thereof such as Sp0, Sp1, Sp2, Sp*0, and -Sp"-X"- are, for example, -(CH2)p1-, -(CH2)p1-O-, -(CH2)p1-O-CO-, -(CH2)p1-CO-O-, - (CH2)p1-O-CO-O-, -(CH2CH2O)q1-CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2-S-CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2-NH- CH2CH2- or -(SiR0R00-O)p1-, in which p1 is an integer from 1 to 12, q1 is an integer from 1 to 3, and R0 and R00 have the meanings indicated above. 25 Particularly preferred groups Sp, including any variations thereof such as Sp0, Sp1, Sp2, Sp*0, and -Sp"-X"- are -(CH2)p1-, -(CH2)p1-O-, -(CH2)p1-O-CO-, -(CH2)p1-CO-O-, -(CH2)p1- O-CO-O-, in which p1 and q1 have the meanings indicated above. 30 Particularly preferred groups Sp" are, in each case straight-chain, ethylene, propylene, butylene, pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, octylene, nonylene, decylene, undecylene, dodecylene, octadecylene, ethyleneoxyethylene, methyleneoxybutylene, ethylenethioethylene, ethylene-N-methyliminoethylene, 1-methylalkylene, ethenylene, propenylene and butenylene. 35 In another preferred embodiment of the invention, the polymerizable compounds as disclosed above and below, including compounds of formulae D, M, T, A, I* and their subformulae, contain a spacer group Sp, including any variations thereof such P24068 De - 23 - as Sp0, Sp1, Sp2, Sp*0, that is substituted by one or more polymerizable groups P, so that the group Sp-P etc. corresponds to Sp(P)s, with s being ≥2 (branched 5 polymerizable groups). Preferred polymerizable compounds according to this preferred embodiment are those wherein s is 2, i.e., compounds which contain a group Sp(P)2. Very preferred polymerizable compounds according to this preferred embodiment contain a group 10 selected from the following formulae: -X-alkyl-CHPP Sp1 -X-alkyl-CH((CH2)aaP)((CH2)bbP) Sp2 15 -X-N((CH2)aaP)((CH2)bbP) Sp3 -X-alkyl-CHP-CH2-CH2P Sp4 20 -X-alkyl-C(CH2P)(CH2P)-CaaH2aa+1 Sp5 -X-alkyl-CHP-CH2P Sp6 -X-alkyl-CPP-CaaH2aa+1 Sp7 25 -X-alkyl-CHPCHP-CaaH2aa+1 Sp8 in which P is as defined above, 30 alkyl denotes a single bond or straight-chain or branched alkylene having 1 to 12 C atoms which is unsubstituted or mono- or polysubstituted by F, Cl or CN and in which one or more non-adjacent CH2 groups may each, independently of one another, be replaced by -C(R0)=C(R0)-, -C^C- , -N(R0)-, -O-, -S-, -CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O- in such a way that O 35 and/or S atoms are not linked directly to one another, where R0 has the meaning indicated above, aa and bb each, independently of one another, denote 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, P24068 De - 24 - X has one of the meanings indicated for X", and is preferably O, CO, SO2, 5 O-CO-, CO-O or a single bond. Preferred groups Sp(P)2 are selected from formulae Sp1, Sp2 and Sp3. Very preferred groups Sp(P)2 are selected from the following subformulae: 10 -CHPP Sp1a -O-CHPP Sp1b 15 -CH2-CHPP Sp1c -OCH2-CHPP Sp1d -CH(CH2-P)(CH2-P) Sp2a 20 -OCH(CH2-P)(CH2-P) Sp2b -CH2-CH(CH2-P)(CH2-P) Sp2c 25 -OCH2-CH(CH2-P)(CH2-P) Sp2d -CO-NH((CH2)2P)((CH2)2P) Sp3a Detailed Description 30 The RM formulations according to the present invention contain solvents or solvent blends as described above and below which, in combination with the RMs as described above and below, enable an RM formulation that shows advantageous properties like good solubility, good jetting properties, high stability, suitable 35 processing window and good process compatibility, and allows tuning of the parameters needed for printing, especially for inkjet printing. P24068 De - 25 - Moreover, the RM formulations are also suitable for other printing or coating methods, as will be further specified below. 5 In particular, the RM formulations according to the present invention enable to meet one or more of the following requirements, which are important for a good inkjet printing process: - the solubility of the RMs is at 15-30 wt% of solids, and is soluble at max. 70°C, 10 - the RM formulation is stable at room temperature over several days, - the RM formulation is jettable with a viscosity at least above 3.5 cP (at 20°C), - the solvent or solvent blend has a boiling temperature Tb ≥ 180°C, - the solvent or solvent blend is removable at processing conditions, preferably at max.100°C during max.5 min, to allow for the alignment of RM, 15 - the solvent or solvent blend does not damage the photoalignment layer or another layer, for example another RM layer, underneath, onto which the RM formulation is deposited. The RM formulation according to the present invention preferably consists of a 20 solvent component, which contains a solvent or solvent blend of two or more solvents, at least one of which is selected from formulae S1 and S2, and an RM component, which comprises an RM or RM mixture and optionally one or more additives. 25 Preferably all solvents in the RM formulation are selected from organic solvents. In the solvents of formula S1, ArS1 is preferably selected from phenyl, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, pyridine, pyran or 2,2-, 2,4- or 2,6-thiopyran, very preferably from phenyl, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups LS. 30 In the solvents of formula S2, ArS2 is preferably selected from 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4- phenylene, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, pyridine, pyran or 2,2-, 2,4- or 2,6-thiopyran, very preferably from 1,2-phenylene, 1,3-phenylene and 1,4-phenylene, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups LS. 35 In the solvents of formula S2, preferably ZS2 is -O-CO- and ZS2 is -CO-O, or ZS2 is - O-CO- and ZS3 is -CO-O-. P24068 De - 26 - In the solvents of formulae S1 and S2, LS is preferably selected from, alkyl, alkoxy or alkyl carbonyl with 1 to 5 C atoms. 5 In the solvents of formula S1, RS1 is preferably selected from methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl, very preferably from methyl and ethyl. In the solvents of formula S1, RS2 and RS3 are preferably selected from methyl, ethyl, 10 propyl and butyl, very preferably from methyl and ethyl. Further preferably RS2 and RS3 have the same meaning. Preferred solvents of formula S1 and S2 are selected from the following subformulae: 15 20 25 30 35 P24068 De - 27 - 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 wherein RS1, RS2, RS3 and b have the meanings given in formulae S1 and S2 or one of the preferred meanings given above and below, RS1 is preferably methyl or ethyl, RS2 and RS3 are preferably methyl or ethyl, and b is preferably 4. P24068 De - 28 - Very preferred are solvents selected from subformulae S1-1, S1-2, S1-3, S1-4, S2- 1, and S2-5. 5 Preferably RS2 and RS3 in formula S2 and its subformulae have the same meaning. Very preferably the first solvent is selected from methyl benzoate, ethyl benzoate, methyl phenylacetate, butyl benzoate, benzyl propionate, phenyl proprionate, 10 dimethyl phthalate and diethyl adipate, most preferably from methyl benzoate, methyl phenylacetate and ethyl benzoate. Preferably the first solvent, or the solvent blend, as used in the RM formulation according to the present invention has a boiling point ≥180°C, very preferably from 15 190°C to 300°C, most preferably from 195°C to 260°C. Further preferably the first solvent, or the solvent blend, as used in the RM formulation according to the present invention has the following Hansen Solubility Parameters (in MPa0.5): 20 ^D from 15 to 20, preferably from 17 to 19.5, very preferably from 17.5 to 18.5, ^P from 5 to 12, preferably from 5.5 to 11, very preferably from 6.5 to 10.5, ^H from 4 to 8, preferably from 4.5 to 7, very preferably from 5 to 6.5. 25 In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation comprises at least one second solvent which is different from the first solvent. The second solvent can be selected from any organic solvents that are known in the art and suitable for dissolving RMs or RM mixtures. 30 Preferably the second solvent is selected from ketones such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone (MEK), methyl propyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone (MIBK), cyclopentanone or cyclohexanone; acetates such as methyl, ethyl or butyl acetate or methyl acetoacetate; alcohols such as methanol, ethanol or isopropyl alcohol; alicyclic hydrocarbons such as cyclopentane or cyclohexane; halogenated 35 hydrocarbons such as di- or trichloromethane; glycols or their esters such as, PGME (propylene glycol 1-methyl ether), PGMEA (propyl glycol monomethyl ether acetate) or DPMAc (di(propylene glycol) methyl ether acetate), ^-butyrolactone, menthyl isovalerate, or binary, ternary or higher mixtures of the aforementioned solvents. P24068 De - 29 - More preferably, the second solvent is selected from aliphatic ketones, cyclic 5 ketones, alkyl ethers of ethylene glycol or propylene glycol, or aromatic solvents. Very preferably the second solvent is selected from cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, DPMAc, PGMEA, PGME, menthyl isovalerate, MEK, MIBK, phenyl naphthalene and benzyl benzoate or mixtures thereof. Most preferably the second 10 solvent is selected from cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, PGME, PGMEA and MEK or mixtures thereof. The second solvent may also be selected from organic solvents having a boiling point below 180°C, in which case preferably its proportion in the solvent blend is 15 selected such that the entire solvent blend has a boiling point ≥180°C. The ratio (by weight) of the first and second solvents in the solvent blend of the RM formulation is preferably from 50:50 to 90:10, very preferably from 60:40 to 85:15, most preferably from 70:30 to 80:20. 20 In a first preferred embodiment the RM formulation contains only one or more, preferably exactly one, first solvent(s) selected formula S1 and S2 and their subformulae, very preferably from formula S1 and its subformulae. 25 In a second preferred embodiment the RM formulation contains a blend of one or more, preferably exactly one, first solvents and one or more, preferably exactly one, second solvents, wherein the first sovents are selected from formula S1 and S2 and their subformulae, very preferably from formula S1 and its subformulae, and the second solvent is preferably cyclohexanone. 30 Further preferably the RM formulation and solvent blend do not contain any other solvents than the first and second solvents as defined above and below. Unless stated otherwise, the concentrations of the RMs and additives as give above 35 and below refer to the RM component or RM mixture of the RM formulation and may also expressed as “% by weight of total solids” or “% by weight of all solids”. P24068 De - 30 - The proportion of all solvents in the RM formulation according to the present invention is preferably from 50 to 95%, very preferably from 60 to 95%, most 5 preferably from 65 to 90% by weight. The total concentration of all solids, including the RMs, in the RM formulation is preferably from 5 to 50%, more preferably from 5 to 40%, most preferably from 10 to 35% by weight. 10 Preferably, the RM formulation comprises one or more RMs having one polymerizable functional group (monoreactive RMs) and/or one or more RMs having two or more polymerizable functional groups (di- or multireactive RMs). 15 In a preferred embodiment the RM formulation comprises one or more di- or multi- reactive RMs. These di-or multireactive RMs are preferably selected of formula D P1-Sp1-MG-Sp2-P2 D 20 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings P1, P2 a polymerizable group, 25 Sp1, Sp2 a spacer group or a single bond, and MG a rod-shaped mesogenic group, which is preferably selected of formula MG 30 -(A1-Z1)n-A2- MG A1 and A2 an aromatic or alicyclic group, which optionally contains one or more heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, and is optionally mono- or polysubstituted by L, 35 L P-Sp-, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO2 , -NCO, -NCS, -OCN, -SCN, - C(=O)NRxRy, -C(=O)ORx, -C(=O)Rx, -NRxRy, -OH, -SF5, optionally substituted silyl, aryl or heteroaryl with 1 to 12, preferably 1 to 6 C P24068 De - 31 - atoms, and straight chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 12, 5 preferably 1 to 6 C atoms, wherein one or more H atoms are optionally replaced by F or Cl, Rx and Ry H or alkyl with 1 to 12 C-atoms, 10 Z1 -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-CO-, -CO-S-, -O-COO-, -CO-NR00-, - - C , - ( C 15 single bond, preferably -COO-, -OCO- or a single bond, R00, R000 H or alkyl having 1 to 12 C atoms, Y1 and Y2 H, F, Cl or CN, 20 n 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 1 or 2, most preferably 2, n1 an integer from 1 to 10, preferably 1, 2, 3 or 4. 25 Preferred groups A1 and A2 include, without limitation, furan, pyrrol, thiophene, oxazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, imidazole, phenylene, cyclohexylene, bicyclooctylene, cyclohexenylene, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, azulene, indane, fluorene, naphthalene, tetrahydronaphthalene, anthracene, phenanthrene and dithienothiophene, all of which are unsubstituted or substituted by 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups 30 L as defined above. Particular preferred groups A1 and A2 are selected from 1,4-phenylene, pyridine-2,5- diyl, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl, thiophene-2,5-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro- naphthalene-2,6-diyl, indane-2,5-diyl, bicyclooctylene or 1,4-cyclohexylene wherein 35 one or two non-adjacent CH2 groups are optionally replaced by O and/or S, wherein these groups are unsubstituted or substituted by 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups L as defined above. P24068 De - 32 - Preferred RMs of formula D are selected of formula Da 5 (L) r (L)r (L) r 0 Da P wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence 10 identically or differently, have the following meanings P0 a polymerizable group, preferably an acryl, methacryl, oxetane, epoxy, vinyl, heptadiene, vinyloxy, propenyl ether or styrene group, 15 Z0 -COO-, -OCO-, -CH2CH2-, -CF2O-, -OCF2-, -C^C-, -CH=CH-,-OCO- CH=CH-, -CH=CH-COO-, or a single bond, L has one of the meanings given in formula D, and is preferably selected from F, Cl, CN or optionally halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, alkylcarbonyl, 20 alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 5 C atoms, r 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, 25 x and y 0 or identical or different integers from 1 to 12, z 0 or 1, with z being 0 if the adjacent x or y is 0. Very preferred RMs of formula D are selected from the following formulae: 30 P a1 35 P (CH2)x(O)z COO COO (O)z(CH2)yP a2 P24068 De - 33 - (L) r (L)r (L) r P a3 5 P a4 10 P a5 15 P a6 P a7 20 P b 25 P P d 30 P 2 x+1 2 y+1 e 35 wherein P0, L, r, x, y and z are as defined in formula Da, s is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and t is 0, 1 or 2. P24068 De - 34 - Especially preferred are compounds of formula Da1, Da2 and Da3, in particular those of formula Da1. 5 In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation contains one or more direactive RMs of formula D wherein at least one group Z1 denotes -C^C, very preferably selected from formulae Df, Dg, Dh, Di, Dk and Dm. 10 In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation comprises one or more monoreactive RMs. These monoreactive RMs are preferably selected from formula M: P1-Sp1-MG-R22 M 15 wherein P1, Sp1 and MG have the meanings given in formula D, R22 denotes P-Sp-, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO2 , -NCO, -NCS, -OCN, -SCN, - C(=O)NRxRy, -C(=O)X, -C(=O)ORx, -C(=O)Ry, -NRxRy, -OH, -SF5, 20 optionally substituted silyl, straight chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 12, preferably 1 to 6 C atoms, wherein one or more H atoms are optionally replaced by F or Cl, 25 X is halogen, preferably F or Cl, and Rx and Ry are independently of each other H or alkyl with 1 to 12 C-atoms. Preferably the RMs of formula M are selected from the following formulae. 30 P M1 P M2 35 P -(CH2)x(O)z H COO M3 w R P24068 De - 35 - 0 0 M4 5 P-(CH2)x(O)z COO ( P0 0 (CH2)x(O)z A COO 5 10 (L) 0 P(CH2)x(O)z COO 6 15 0 7 P-(CH2)x(O)z COO (L) r 20 P0-(CH2)x-(O)z COO 8 0 9 P(CH2)x-(O)z 25 (L)r 0 P(CH2)x(O)z 10 30 0 P-(CH2)x(O)z 11 (L) (L) 0 12 P-(CH2)x(O)z COO 35 0 13 P-(CH2)x(O)z H COO H H R P24068 De - 36 - F 5 4 10 5 15 6 20 7 8 25 9 30 0 1 35 N P24068 De - 37 - 0 0 S 0 0 M22 P 5 23 P 10 P 24 15 P 25 P 20 26 27 P 25 wherein P0, L, r, x, y, z, s and t are as defined in formula Da and Dk, R0, R01 30 and R02 are each an idependently alkyl, alkoxy, thioalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 or more, preferably 1 to 15 C atoms or denotes Y0 or P-(CH2)y-(O)z-, X 35 -N=N-, -CH=CR01-, -CF=CF-, -C^C-, -CH=CH-COO-, -OCO-CH=CH- or a single bond P24068 De - 38 - Y0 is F, Cl, CN, NO2, OCH3, OCN, SCN, SF5, or mono- oligo- or 5 polyfluorinated alkyl or alkoxy with 1 to 4 C atoms, Z0 is -COO-, -OCO-, -CH2CH2-, -CF2O-, -OCF2-, -CH=CH-,-OCO-CH=CH-, -CH=CH-COO-, or a single bond, 10 A0 is, in case of multiple occurrence independently of one another, 1,4- phenylene that is unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups L, or trans-1,4-cyclohexylene, R01,02 are independently of each other H, R0 or Y0, 15 u and v are independently of each other 0, 1 or 2, w is 0 or 1, 20 and wherein the benzene and naphthalene rings can additionally be substituted with one or more identical or different groups L. Especially preferred are compounds of formula M1, M4, M7, M8, M9, M10, M11, in particular those of formula M1, M4 and M7, further more those of formula M8, M9 25 and M10. In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation contains one or more monoreactive RMs of formula M wherein the group MG1 contains at least one group Z1 that denotes -C^C, very preferably selected from formulae M8 to M10. 30 In formulae D, M and their preferred subformulae, L is preferably selected from F, Cl, CN, NO2 or straight chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 12 C atoms, wherein the alkyl groups are optionally perfluorinated, or P-Sp-. 35 Very preferably L is selected from F, Cl, CN, NO2, CH3, C2H5, C(CH3)3, CH(CH3)2, CH2CH(CH3)C2H5, OCH3, OC2H5, COCH3, COC2H5, COOCH3, COOC2H5, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, OC2F5 or P-Sp-, in particular F, Cl, CN, CH3, C2H5, C(CH3)3, P24068 De - 39 - CH(CH3)2, OCH3, COCH3 or OCF3, most preferably F, Cl, CH3, C(CH3)3, OCH3 or COCH3, or P-Sp-. 5 In another preferred embodiment the present invention, the RM formulation contains one or more RMs of formula T T 10 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings 15 P a polymerizable group, Sp a spacer group or a single bond, R11 H, F, Cl, CN, alkyl, alkoxy, thioalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, 20 alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 15, preferably with 1 to 5, C atoms which is optionally optionally fluorinated, or P-Sp, A, B, D, and E are selected from the group consisting of 1,4-phenylene, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl, 25 anthracene-9,10-diyl, fluorene-2,7-diyl, dibenzothiophene-2,7-diyl, dibenzofuran-2,7-diyl, benzo[1,2-b:4,5-b']dithiophene-2,5-diyl, indole-4,7- diyl, benzothiophene-4,7-diyl, 9,10-dihydro-phenanthrene-2,7-diyl, 1,2,3,4- tetrahydronaphthalene-5,8-diyl or indane-2,5-diyl, where, in addition, one or more CH groups in these groups may be replaced by N, all of which are 30 optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp-. C is selected from the group consisting of benzene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4- diyl, anthracene-9,10-diyl, fluorene-2,7-diyl, dibenzofuran-2,7-diyl, dibenzothiophene-2,7-diyl, benzo[1,2-b:4,5-b']dithiophene-2,5-diyl, indole- 35 4,7-diyl, benzothiophene-4,7-diyl, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp. and one of rings C and D may also denote a single bond, P24068 De - 40 - L F, Cl, -CN, -SCN, P-Sp-, or straight chain, branched or cyclic alkyl having 1 5 to 25 C atoms, wherein one or more non-adjacent CH2-groups are optionally replaced by -O-, -S-, -CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, CR0=CR00-, -C^C-, 10 in s uch a manner that O- and/or S-atoms are not directly connected with each other, and wherein one or more H atoms are each optionally replaced by P-Sp-, F or Cl, or two substituents L that are connected to directly adjacent C atoms may also form a cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl group with 5, 6, 15 7 or 8 C atoms, Z11 12 0 -, 0 20 -, preferably -COO-, -OCO-, -C^C-, or a single bond, most preferably a single bond, 25 R0, R00 H or alkyl having 1 to 12 C atoms, Y1, Y2 H, F, Cl, NCS, or CN, m1, m2 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, very preferably 0 or 1, most preferably 0, 30 n1 1, 2, 3 or 4. The RMs of formula T show a high extraordinary refractive index ne and a high birefringence. 35 Preferably A, B, D and E in formula T are selected from the group consisting of P24068 De - 41 - 5 10 , 15 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings 20 L P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5, SC2H5, 25 r 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, s 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0 or 1, t 0, 1 or 2, preferably 0 or 1. 30 More preferably rings A, B, D and/or E in formula T are selected from the group consisting of benzene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene 2,6-diyl, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl, anthracene-9,10-diyl, fluorene-2,7-diyl, dibenzofuran-2,7-diyl, dibenzothiophene-2,7-diyl, benzo[1,2-b:4,5-b']dithiophene-2,5-diyl, indole-4,7-diyl, 35 benzothiophene-4,7-diyl, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L and/or P-Sp-. P24068 De - 42 - Very preferably one, two, three, four or more of rings A, B, D and/or E in formula T are selected from the group consisting of 5 , 10 wherein L, on each occurrence identically or differently, denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, OCH3, SCH3, 15 C2H5, OC2H5, SC2H5. Especially preferred are compounds of formula T, in particular wherein n=m=0, wherein the rings B and D are selected from the group consisting of benzene-1,4- diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl or anthracene-9,10-diyl, all of which 20 are optionally mono- or disubstituted by L and/or P-Sp-. Preferably ring C in formula T is selected from the group consisting of 25 , , and 30 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings L P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated 35 and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5, SC2H5, r 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, P24068 De - 43 - s 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0 or 1, 5 t 0, 1 or 2, preferably 0 or 1. More preferably C in formula T is selected from the group consisting of 10 , 15 20 wherein L, on each occurrence identically or differently, denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5, SC2H5. 25 Very preferably ring C in formula T is selected from the group consisting of benzene- 1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl or anthracene-9,10-diyl, all of which are optionally mono- or disubstituted by L and/or P-Sp-. 30 Further preferred are compounds of formula T, preferably those wherein n=m=0, wherein the rings B, C and D form a mesogenic group selected from the following formulae or their mirror images: 1 35 2 P24068 De - 44 - (L)r TM03 5 TM04 TM05 10 TM06 15 TM07 TM08 20 TM09 25 TM010 TM011 30 TM012 TM013 35 P24068 De - 45 - TM014 5 5 10 6 15 7 20 8 25 9 30 0 1 35 2 P24068 De - 46 - TM023 5 4 5 10 6 15 7 8 20 9 0 25 1 30 wherein the naphthalene and phenanthrene groups are optionally substituted with one or two groups L, and L and r are as defined in formula T. In formulae TM1 to TM031, preferably L on each occurrence identically or differently denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated 35 and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, very preferably P- Sp-, methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, thiomethyl or thioethyl, most preferably methyl or ethyl, and r is preferably 0, 1, 2 or 3, very preferably 0, 1 or 2. P24068 De - 47 - Very preferred are the groups of formulae TM01 to TM10, especially the groups of formula TM01 to TM07. 5 Very preferred compounds of formula T are selected from the following subformulae: 10 15 20 25 P- P- 30 0 35 1 P24068 De - 48 - 2 5 3 10 4 5 15 6 7 20 8 25 9 0 30 1 35 2 P24068 De - 49 - 23 5 24 1 25 26 1 27 2 28 2 29 30 3 31 3 P24068 De - 50 - 5 2 3 10 4 5 15 P-Sp N 6 P-Sp N 7 20 8 25 9 0 30 1 (L) r P-Sp 2 35 3 P24068 De - 51 - (L) r O (L)r P-Sp P T-44 5 (L) r S P-Sp P T-45 10 T-46 T-47 15 T-48 T-49 20 (L)r L L P-Sp T-50 T-51 25 T-52 T-53 30 T-54 35 T-55 (L)r P-Sp T-56 P24068 De - 52 - T-57 5 T-58 T-59 10 T-60 15 T-61 T-62 20 T-63 L P-Sp R T-64 L 25 T-65 T-66 30 T-67 35 T-68 P24068 De - 53 - 69 5 70 10 71 72 15 73 20 74 75 25 76 30 77 78 35 79 P24068 De - 54 - 80 5 81 1 82 83 1 84 2 85 2 86 3 87 3 88 P24068 De - 55 - 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 0 P24068 De - 56 - 01 5 02 03 10 04 15 wherein the naphthalene and phenanthrene groups are optionally substituted with one or two groups L, and P, Sp, L and r, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the meanings given in formula T or one of the preferred meanings given above and below, and R has one of the meanings 20 given for R11 in formula T, and preferably denotes OCH3 or SCH3, very preferably OCH3. L is preferably selected from alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl having 1 to 6, more preferably 1, 2 or 3 C atoms, very preferably from methyl or ethyl. P is preferably acrylate. 25 Very preferred are the compounds of formulae T-1 to T-20, especially the compounds of formulae T-1 to T-16. In another preferred embodiment of the present invention, the RM formulation contains one or more RMs of formula T which contain a -C^C- group (acetylene 30 group) in the spacer, preferably a -C^C- group that is directly attached to an outer benzene or naphthalene group of the mesogenic core. These RMs are preferably selected from formula A: 35 A P24068 De - 57 - wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings 5 P a polymerizable group, Sp a spacer group or a single bond, 10 Sp1 a spacer group or a single bond, preferably alkylene with 1 to 12, more preferably with 3 to 6, C atoms, R33 H, F, Cl, CN, CH=CH2, alkyl, alkoxy, thioalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 6, 15 preferably with 1 to 3, C atoms which is optionally fluorinated or chlorinated, or P-Sp, AA, BA phenylene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, fluorene- 2,7-diyl, dibenzothiophene-2,7-diyl, dibenzofuran-2,7-diyl, benzo[1,2-b:4,5- 20 b']dithiophene-2,5-diyl, indole-4,7-diyl, benzothiophene-4,7-diyl, 9,10- dihydro-phenanthrene-2,7-diyl or 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-5,8-diyl where, in addition, one or more CH groups in these groups may be replaced by N, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp-. 25 CA phenylene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, or naphthalene-2,6-diyl, preferably phenylene-1,4-diyl or naphthalene-2,6-diyl, in which, in addition, one or more CH groups in these groups may be replaced by N, and which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp-, 30 wherein preferably not more than one of AA, BA and CA denote naphthalene-1,4-diyl, L F, Cl, -CN, -SCN, P-Sp-, or straight chain, branched or cyclic alkyl having 1 35 to 25 C atoms nally rep - C-, , , , , P24068 De - 58 - or , 5 in s uch a manner that O- and/or S-atoms are not directly connected with each other, and wherein one or more H atoms are each optionally replaced by P-Sp-, F or Cl, or two substituents L that are connected to directly adjacent C atoms may also form a cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl group with 5, 6, 7 or 8 C atoms, 10 Z11 -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-CO-, -CO-S-, -O-COO-, -CO-NR0- -NR0- CO-, -NR0-CO-NR00, -NR0-CO-O-, -O-CO-NR0-, -OCH2-, -C CH2S-, -CF2O-, -OCF2-, -CF2S-, -SCF2-, -CH2CH2-, -(CH2)n1, CH2CF2-, -CF2CF2-, -CH=N-, -N=CH-, -N=N-, -CH=CR0-, -C -, - 15 CH=CH-COO-, -OCO-CH=CH- or a single bond, preferably , - C^C-, or a single bond, most preferably a single bond, R0, R00 H or alkyl having 1 to 12 C atoms, 20 Y1, Y2 H, F, Cl, NCS, or CN, m2 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, more preferably 0 or 1, most preferably 0, 25 m3 0 or 1, n1 1, 2, 3 or 4, s 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0, 1 or 2. 30 The RMs of formula A show a very high extraordinary refractive index ne and a very high birefringence. Moreover, their maximum absorbance peak is shifted towards lower wavelengths, with a steepened pitch of the UV absorbance curve, which results in less coloring of the RMs and polymer films made thereof. 35 In the compounds of formula A, preferably AA and BA are selected from the group consisting of P24068 De - 59 - 5 , 10 wherein at least one of AA and BA is selected from phenylene-1,4-diyl and napththalene-2,6-diyl, and wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings L P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated 15 and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5, SC2H5, CHO, COCH3, COOCH3 or COOH, r 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, 20 s 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0 or 1, t 0, 1 or 2, preferably 0 or 1. 25 More preferably rings AA and BA in formula A are selected from the group consisting of phenylene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl and naphthalene 2,6-diyl, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L and/or P-Sp-, wherein not more than one of A and B may denote naphthalene-1,4-diyl. 30 Very preferably one, two, three, four or more of rings AA and BA in formula A are sel , 35 and , P24068 De - 60 - wherein not more than one of AA and BA may denote naphthalene-1,4-diyl and wherein L, on each occurrence identically or differently, denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, 5 or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, F, Cl, CN, CH3, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5 or SC2H5. Especially preferred are compounds of formula A, in particular wherein n=m=0, 10 wherein the ring BA is selected from the group consisting of phenylene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl and naphthalene-2,6-diyl, preferably phenylene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl and naphthalene-2,6-diyl, all of which are optionally mono- or disubstituted by L and/or P-Sp-. 15 Preferably ring CA in formula A is selected from the group consisting of nd 20 , wherein L, on each occurrence identically or differently, denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, preferably P-Sp-, F, Cl, CN, CH3, OCH3, SCH3, 25 C2H5, OC2H5 or SC2H5. Further preferred are compounds of formula A wherein m=1 and/or at least one of rings BA and CA denotes naphthalene-2,6-diyl. 30 Further preferred are compounds of formula A wherein m=0, preferably those wherein n=0, wherein rings BA and CA together with the phenylene-1,4-diyl group form a group selected from the following formulae or their mirror images, wherein * denotes the linkage to the acetylene group in formula A: 35 AM01 P24068 De - 61 - AM02 5 3 4 10 5 6 15 7 20 8 wherein the naphthalene groups are optionally substituted with one or two groups L, r is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, and L is as defined in formula A. 25 Further preferred are compounds of formula A wherein m=1, preferably those wherein n=0, wherein rings BA and CA together with the naphthalene-2,6-diyl group form a group selected from the following formulae or their mirror images, wherein * denotes the linkage to the acetylene group in formula A: 30 1 2 35 3 P24068 De - 62 - AM4 5 5 10 6 7 8 15 9 20 wherein the naphthalene groups are optionally substituted with one or two groups L, r is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, and L is as defined in formula A. In formulae AM01 to AM08 and AM1 to AM9, preferably L on each occurrence 25 identically or differently denotes P-Sp-, -CN, F, Cl, or alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl which is optionally fluorinated and has 1 to 6, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, very preferably P-Sp-, F, Cl, CN, CH3, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5 or SC2H5, most preferably CH3 or C2H5, and r is preferably 0, 1, 2 or 3, very preferably 0, 1 or 2. 30 Especially preferred are the groups of formulae AM01, AM02, AM03, AM04, AM1, AM2 and AM3. Very preferred compounds of formula A are selected from the following 35 subformulae: -1 P24068 De - 63 - 2 5 3 4 10 5 15 6 7 20 8 9 25 10 11 30 12 13 35 14 P24068 De - 64 - 15 5 16 17 10 18 19 15 20 20 21 22 25 23 30 24 25 35 26 P24068 De - 65 - 7 5 8 10 9 0 15 1 20 2 3 25 4 5 30 6 7 35 8 P24068 De - 66 - 39 5 0 1 10 2 15 3 4 20 5 6 25 7 8 30 9 0 35 1 P24068 De - 67 - 52 5 53 1 54 55 1 56 2 57 58 2 59 60 3 61 3 62 P24068 De - 68 - 63 5 64 10 wherein the naphthalene groups are optionally substituted with one or two groups L, and P, Sp, L and r, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the meanings given above, and R has one of the meanings given for R11 in formula A, and preferably denotes OCH3 or SCH3, very preferably OCH3. L 15 is preferably selected from F, Cl, CN, CH3, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5 or SC2H5. P is preferably acrylate. Further preferred are the direactive compounds of the formulae A and A-1 to A-64 wherein one of the two groups Sp is a single bond and the other group Sp is 20 different from a single bond. In the compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, P is preferably selected from the group consisting of vinyloxy, acrylate, methacrylate, fluoroacrylate, chloroacrylate, oxetane and epoxide, very preferably 25 from acrylate and methacrylate, most preferably acrylate. Further preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein all polymerizable groups P that are present in the compound have the same meaning, and very preferably denote acrylate or 30 methacrylate, most preferably acrylate. Further preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, which contain one, two, three or four groups P-Sp, very preferably two or three groups P-Sp. 35 Further preferred are compounds of formula T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein R11 is P-Sp-. P24068 De - 69 - Further preferred are compounds of formula M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein R22 or R11, respectively, is selected from F, Cl, 5 CN, CF3, CCl3, CH=CH2, or alkoxy, thioalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 3 C atoms which is optionally fluorinated, more preferably from F, Cl, CN, OCH3, SCH3, OCF3, CF3, CH=CH2, CHO, COCH3, COOCH3, COOC2H5 and CCl3, very preferably from OCH3, OCF3 or CHO, most preferably from OCH3 or OCF3. 10 Further preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein Sp1, and/or Sp2 if present, denotes -(CH2)s1-, wherein s1 is an integer from 1 to 12, more preferably 3, 4, 5 or 6. 15 Further preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein Sp1, and/or Sp2 if present, denotes a single bond or -(CH2)p1-, -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1, or -CO-O-(CH2)p1, wherein p1 is 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, and, if Sp is -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1 or -CO-O-(CH2)p1 the O-atom or CO-group, respectively, is linked to the benzene ring. 20 Further preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein Sp1, and/or Sp2 if present, is a single bond. Further preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as 25 described above and below, wherein Sp1, and/or Sp2 if present, is different from a single bond. Further preferred are compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein m is 1. 30 Further preferred are compounds of formula T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein at least one of B and C denotes naphthalene- 2,6-diyl or naphthalene-1,4-diyl, very preferably naphthalene-2,6-diyl, which is optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp-. 35 Further preferred are compounds of formula T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein L is P-Sp-, F, Cl, -CN, or straight chain, branched or cyclic P24068 De - 70 - alkyl having 1 to 25 C atoms, wherein one or more non-adjacent CH2-groups are optionally replaced by -O-, -S-, -CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, CR0=CR00-, -C^C-, 5 in s uch a manner that O- and/or S-atoms are not directly connected with each other, 10 and wherein one or more H atoms are each optionally replaced by P-Sp-, F or Cl, or two substituents L that are connected to directly adjacent C atoms may also form a cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl group with 5, 6, 7 or 8 C atoms, and wherein R0 and R00 independently of each other denote H or alkyl with 1 to 12 C atoms. 15 Very preferred are compounds of formula T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein L is F, Cl, CN or straight chain alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl having 1 to 6 C atoms or branched or cyclic alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl having 3 to 8 C atoms, most preferably F, Cl, CN, CH3, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5 or SC2H5. 20 Further preferred are compounds of formula T, A and their subformulae as described above and below, wherein Z11 and Z12 denote -COO-, -OCO-, -C^C- or a single bond, more preferably -C^C- or a single bond, most preferably a single bond. Further preferred compounds of the formulae T and A and their subformulae are 25 selected from the following preferred embodiments, including any combination thereof: - n = 0, and/or - ring C or CA, respectively, denotes phenylene-1,4-diyl which is substituted by alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkyl with 1 to 3, preferably 1 or 2 C atoms, more preferably 30 methyl or ethyl, most preferably ethyl, or - ring C or CA, respectively,denotes naphthalene-2,6-diyl, which is optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp-, and/or - ring B or BA, respectively,denotes naphthalene-2,6-diyl, which is optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp-, and/or - m=1 and/or at least one of B and C, or at least one of A A 35 B and C , respectively,denotes naphthalene-2,6-diyl, which is optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp-, P24068 De - 71 - - m=0 and at least one of B and C, or at least one of BA and CA, respectively, denotes naphthalene-2,6-diyl, which is optionally substituted by one or more 5 groups L or P-Sp-, - P denotes acrylate or methacrylate and/or - Sp1 denotes -(CH2)s1-, wherein s1 is an integer from 1 to 1, preferably 3, 4, 5 or 6, and/or - Sp denotes Sp”-X”, preferably, -Sp"-X"- denotes -(CH2)p1-, -(CH2)p1-O-, -(CH2)p1-O- 10 CO-, -(CH2)p1-CO-O-, -(CH2)p1-O-CO-O-, -(CH2CH2O)q1-CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2-S- CH2CH2-, or -CH2CH2-NH-CH2CH2-, in which p1 is an integer from 1 to 12, q1 is an integer from 1 to 3, and/or - L is selected from P-Sp-, F, Cl, CN, CH3, OCH3, SCH3, C2H5, OC2H5 or SC2H5, very preferably CH3 or C2H5, and r denotes 1, and/or 15 - ring C is substituted by one L which denotes P-Sp-, preferably acrylate, and/or - R11 is P-Sp-, or - R11 is F, Cl, CN, OCH3 or SCH3, preferably OCH3 or SCH3, very preferably OCH3. Very preferred compounds of formula T are listed below: 20 T1 25 T2 30 35 P24068 De - 73 - T9 5 T10 10 15 T11 20 T12 O T13 O 25 O 30 T14 T15 35 T16 P24068 De - 74 - T17 5 10 T18 T19 15 O O T20 O 20 T21 T22 25 T23 T24 30 35 P24068 De - 75 - T25 5 10 T26 15 T27 20 T28 T29 25 T30 T31 30 T32 T33 35 O O O O P24068 De - 76 - T34 5 35 O 10 36 37 38 15 39 40 20 41 25 42 43 30 35 44 P24068 De - 77 - T45 5 6 7 10 8 15 9 0 20 1 2 25 3 30 4 35 5 P24068 De - 80 - T71 5 10 T72 T73 15 T74 20 T75 25 Especially preferred are the compounds of formula T-3, T-19, T-21, T-24, T-25, T- 30, T-47, T-50, T-53, T-59, T-60, T-68, T-70, T-71, T-73 and T-75. Very preferred compounds of formula A are listed below: 30 A1 A2 35 P24068 De - 82 - A12 5 13 10 14 15 15 20 16 25 17 18 30 19 35 20 P24068 De - 83 - A21 5 22 10 23 24 15 The synthesis of the compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae can be 20 carried by methods known per se to the person skilled in the art from the literature or in analogy thereto, as described for example in WO 2022/33908 A1. The compounds of formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae either taken alone or in combination with other RMs in an RM formulation, exhibit in particular and 25 preferably at the same time, a high birefringence, exhibit a good solubility in commonly known organic solvents used in mass production, show an improved alignment, have favorable transition temperatures, and show high resistance against yellowing after being exposed to UV light. 30 Preferably the RM formulation contains one or more compounds selected from formulae D, M, T, A and their subformulae. Very preferably the RM formulation contains, preferably 1 to 6, very preferably 1 to 4, RMs, preferably selected from D, M, T, A and their subformulae. 35 If the RM formulation contains one or more di- or multireactive RMs of formula D or its subformulae, their concentration is preferably from 1 to 50%, very preferably from 5 to 30% of total solids. P24068 De - 84 - If the RM formulation contains one or more monoreactive RMs of formula M or its 5 subformulae, their concentration is preferably from 1 to 70%, very preferably from 10 to 50% of total solids. If the RM formulation contains one or more RMs of formula T or its subformulae, their concentration is preferably from 1 to 70%, very preferably from 10 to 50% of 10 total solids. If the RM formulation contains one or more RMs of formula A or its subformulae, their concentration is preferably from 1 to 70%, very preferably from 10 to 50% of total solids. 15 In another preferred embodiment, the RM formulation further comprises one or more chiral compounds which are optionally polymerizable and/or isomerizable. In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation contains one or more, preferably exactly one, chiral compounds, preferably selected from polymerizable 20 chiral compounds, very preferably selected from mono- or direactive chiral polymerizable compounds. Suitable polymerizable chiral compounds preferably comprise one or more ring elements, linked together by a direct bond or via a linking group and, where two of 25 these ring elements optionally may be linked to each other, either directly or via a linking group, which may be identical to or different from the linking group mentioned. The ring elements are preferably selected from the group of four-, five-, six- or seven-, preferably of five- or six-, membered rings. 30 Preferred polymerizable chiral compounds are selected from the formulae C1, C2 and C3: 35 C1 P24068 De - 85 - 5 C2 10 C3 15 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings P0* a polymerizable group, 20 Sp0* a spacer group or a single bond R0* F, Cl, CN, alkyl, alkoxy, thioalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 15, preferably 1 to 6 C atoms, 25 P0*- or P0*-Sp*-, A0, B0, E0, F0 1,4-phenylene that is unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups L, or trans-1,4-cyclohexylene, 30 L F, Cl, CN, P-Sp-, or alkyl, alkoxy, thioalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 5 C atoms that is optionally fluorinated, X1, X2 -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -O-CO-O- or a single bond, 35 Z0 (CH2)4-, -CF2CH2-, -CH2CF2-, -CF2CF2-, -C^C-, -CH=CH-, -CH=CH-COO-, - OCO-CH=CH- or a single bond, preferably -COO-, -OCO- or a single bond, P24068 De - 86 - a0 0, 1 or 2, preferably 0 or 1, 5 b0 0 or an integer from 1 to 12, preferably 1 to 6, t0 0, 1, 2 or 3, 10 z0 0 or 1, preferably 1, and wherein the naphthalene rings can additionally be substituted with one or more identical or different groups L. 15 Further preferred are the stereoisomers of formula C2 wherein the central isosorbide unit is replaced by an isomannide or isoidide unit. The compounds of formula C1 are preferably selected from the following formula: 20 1-1 25 wherein A0, B0, Z0*, X2, P0*, a and b have the meanings given in formula Ca or one of the preferred meanings given above and below, and (OCO) denotes -O-CO- or a single bond. 30 Especially preferred compounds of formula C are selected from the group consisting of the following subformulae: 35 P24068 De - 87 - 5 C1-1-1 10 C1-1-2 15 20 C1-1-3 25 C1-1-4 30 C1-1-5 35 P24068 De - 88 - 5 -6 10 -7 15 20 -8 25 -9 30 wherein R* is -X2-(CH2)t-P0* as defined in formula C1-1, and the benzene and naphthalene rings are unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 groups L as defined above and below. In case one or more polymerizable chiral compounds are present, their 35 concentration in the RM formulation is preferably from 0.1 to 10 %, more preferably from 0.5 to 8 % by weight of total solids. P24068 De - 89 - Preferably the polymerizable chiral compounds have alone or in combination with each other an absolute value of the helical twisting power (IHTPtotalI) of 20 µm-1 or 5 more, preferably of 40 µm-1 or more, more preferably in the range of 60 µm-1 or more, most preferably in the range of 80 µm-1 or more to 260 µm-1 . In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation according to the present invention does not contain any chiral compounds. 10 The RM mixture contained in the RM formulation preferably exhibits a nematic phase or, in case a chiral compound is present, a chiral nematic (also referred to as “cholesteric”) LC phase, or a chiral smectic LC phase and a chiral nematic LC phase, very preferably a nematic or chiral nematic LC phase at room temperature. 15 The RM mixture contained in the RM formulation preferably has a birefringence (^n) in the range from 0.18 to 0.8, more preferably in the range from 0.20 to 0.7 and even more preferably in the range from 0.25 to 0.6. 20 In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation according to the present invention, in addition to the polymerizable compounds of formula D, M, T and A or their subformulae, comprises one or more chiral isomerizable compounds, preferably selected from chiral photoisomerizable compounds. 25 The chiral isomerizable compounds can be polymerizable or not polymerizable. They can be non-mesogenic compounds or mesogenic compounds. If the chiral isomerizable compounds are polymerizable they can be monoreactive or multireactive. 30 In a preferred embodiment the RM formulation according to the present invention comprises one or more chiral isomerizable compounds which are polymerizable. In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation according to the present invention contains exactly one chiral isomerizable compound. 35 Further preferably the RM formulation contains only chiral isomerizable compounds which are polymerizable, preferably selected from mono- or direactive chiral isomerizable compounds. P24068 De - 90 - Further preferably the RM formulation does not contain a chiral compound which 5 does not contain an isomerizable group, in particular does not contain a photoisomerizable group. In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation according to the present invention does not contain any other chiral compounds in addition to the chiral 10 isomerizable compound(s). Suitable polymerizable chiral isomerizable compounds preferably comprise one or more ring elements, linked together by a direct bond or via a linking group and, where two of these ring elements optionally may be linked to each other, either 15 directly or via a linking group, which may be identical to or different from the linking group mentioned. The ring elements are preferably selected from the group of four-, five-, six- or seven-, preferably of five- or six-, membered rings. Preferred chiral isomerizable compounds are selected of formula I*: 20 R3-(A3-Z3)m-G(-(Z4-A4)l -R4)k I* wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings 25 R3, R4 H, F, Cl, CN, P-Sp- or an alkyl radical with up to 25 C atoms which may be unsubstituted, mono- or polysubstituted by halogen or CN, it being also possible for one or more non-adjacent CH2 groups to be replaced, in each case independently from one another, by -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N(CH3)-, -CO-, - 30 COO- -OCO-, -OCO-O-, -S-CO-, -CO-S- or -C^C- in such a manner that oxygen atoms are not linked directly to one another, P a polymerizable group, 35 Sp a spacer group or a single bond, P24068 De - 91 - Z3, Z4 -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -CH2CH2-, -OCH2-, -CH2O-, -CH=CH-, -CH=CH-CO-O-, - O-CO-CH=CH-, -CH=C(CN)-CO-O-, -O-CO-C(CN)=CH-, -N=N-, -CH=N-, - 5 N=CH-, -C^C-, or a single bond, A3, A4 an alicyclic, heterocyclic, aromatic or heteroaromatic group with 4 to 20 ring atoms, which is monocyclic or polycyclic and which is optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp-, 10 G a chiral group, L F, Cl, -CN, -SCN, P-Sp-, or straight chain, branched or cyclic alkyl having 1 to 25 C atoms, wherein one or more non-adjacent CH2-groups are 15 optionally replaced by -O-, -S-, -CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, C ^ , 20 in such a manner that O- and/or S-atoms are not directly connected with each other, and wherein one or more H atoms are each optionally replaced by P-Sp-, F or Cl, or two substituents L that are connected to directly adjacent C atoms may also form a cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl group with 5, 6, 25 7 or 8 C atoms, and wherein R0 and R00 independently of each other denote H or alkyl with 1 to 12 C atoms, m, l independently of each other 0, 1, 2 or 3, 30 k 0, 1 or 2, wherein the compound contains at least one isomerizable group, which is preferably a photoisomerizable group. 35 In the compounds of formula I* and its subformulae as described above and below, if R3 or R4 is an alkyl or alkoxy radical, i.e. where the terminal CH2 group is replaced by -O-, this may be straight-chain or branched. It is preferably straight-chain, has 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 carbon atoms and accordingly is preferably ethyl, propyl, butyl, P24068 De - 92 - pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy, hexoxy, heptoxy, or octoxy, furthermore methyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, tetradecyl, 5 pentadecyl, methoxy, nonoxy, decoxy, undecoxy, dodecoxy, tridecoxy or tetradecoxy, for example. Oxaalkyl, i.e. where one CH2 group is replaced by -O-, is preferably straight-chain 2- oxapropyl (=methoxymethyl), 2- (=ethoxymethyl) or 3-oxabutyl (=2-methoxyethyl), 2- 10 , 3-, or 4-oxapentyl, 2-, 3-, 4-, or 5-oxahexyl, 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, or 6-oxaheptyl, 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-oxaoctyl, 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7- or 8-oxanonyl or 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-,7-, 8- or 9- oxadecyl, for example. Preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein at least 15 one of R3 and R4, preferably both R3 and R4, denote P-Sp-. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein at least one of R3 and R4, preferably both R3 and R4, is different from P-Sp-, and preferably denotes alkyl or alkoxy with 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to C atoms, and 20 one of R3 and R4 may also denote F, Cl or CN. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein A3 and A4 are selected from the group consisting of 1,4-phenylene, 1,3-phenylene, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl, 9,10-dihydro- 25 phenanthrene-2,7-diyl, anthracene-2,7-diyl, anthracene-9,10-diyl, fluorene-2,7-diyl, dibenzothiophene-2,7-diyl, dibenzofuran-2,7-diyl, benzo[1,2-b:4,5-b']dithiophene- 2,5-diyl, indole-4,7-diyl, benzothiophene-4,7-diyl, coumarine, flavone, where, in addition, one or more CH groups in these groups may be replaced by N, cyclohexane-1,4-diyl, in which, in addition, one or more non-adjacent CH2 groups 30 may be replaced by O and/or S, 1,4-cyclohexenylene, bicycle[1.1.1]pentane-1,3-diyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octane-1,4-diyl, spiro[3.3]heptane-2,6-diyl, piperidine-1,4-diyl, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl, indane-2,5- diyl, octahydro-4,7-methanoindane-2,5-diyl, 2-benzylidene-1-indanone, chalcone, chromone and pentalenone, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more 35 groups L or P-Sp-. Very preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein A3 and A4 are selected from the group consisting of 1,4-phenylene, naphthalene-1,4- P24068 De - 93 - diyl, naphthalene 2,6-diyl, 1,4-cyclohexylene in which, in addition, one or two non- adjacent CH2 groups may be replaced by O and/or S, 1,4-cyclohexenylene, 1,4- 5 bicyclo(2,2,2)octylene, piperidine-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl, or 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-naphthalene-2,6-diyl, very preferably 1,4-phenylene or 1,4-cyclohexylene, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp. 10 Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein Z3 and Z4 independently of each other denote -CO-O-, -O-CO- or a single bond. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein L is selected from F, Cl, CN, CH3, C2H5, OCH3, OC2H5, COCH3, COC2H5, CF3, OCF3, 15 P-Sp-, in particular F, Cl, CN, CH3, C2H5, OCH3, COCH3 or OCF3 , most preferably F, CH3, OCH3 or COCH3. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein P is selected from the group consisting of vinyloxy, acrylate, methacrylate, 20 fluoroacrylate, chloroacrylate, oxetane and epoxide, very preferably from acrylate and methacrylate, most preferably acrylate. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein Sp denotes a single bond or -(CH2)p1-, -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1, or -CO-O- 25 (CH2)p1, wherein p1 is an integer from 2 to 10, preferably 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, and, if Sp is -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1 or -CO-O-(CH2)p1 the O-atom or CO-group, respectively, is linked to the benzene ring. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein all 30 polymerizable groups P that are present in the compound have the same meaning, and very preferably denote acrylate or methacrylate, most preferably acrylate. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those which contain one, two, three or four groups P-Sp, very preferably two or three groups P- 35 Sp. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein at least one group Sp is a single bond. P24068 De - 94 - Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein at 5 least one group Sp is a single bond and at least one group Sp is different from a single bond. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein at least one group Sp is different from a single bond, and is selected from -(CH2)p1-, - 10 O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1, or -CO-O-(CH2)p1, wherein p1 is an integer from 2 to 10, preferably 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, and, if Sp is -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1 or -CO-O-(CH2)p1 the O-atom or CO-group, respectively, is linked to the benzene ring. In the event that Ra or Rb is a group of formula P-Sp-, the spacer groups on each 15 side of the mesogenic core may be identical or different. In the compounds of formula I* and its subformulae as described above and below, m and l are preferably 0 or 1. 20 In the compounds of formula I* and its subformulae as described above and below, q is preferably 0 or 1, very preferably 0. Of the compounds of formula I*, the following are especially preferred: 25 R R R P- P- 30 P- P- P- P- P- 35 P- P-Sp-A3-Z3-A3-Z3-G-Z4-A4-Z4-A4-Sp-P I*12 P24068 De - 95 - wherein P, Sp, A3, A4, Z3, Z4 and G have the meanings given for formula I* or one of their preferred meanings as described above and below, R* has one of the 5 meanings of R3 which is different from P-Sp-, and R** has one of the meanings of R4 which is different from P-Sp-. Of these preferred compounds, particularly preferred are those of formula I*8 to I*10, very particularly preferred those of formula I*8. 10 A smaller group of particularly preferred compounds of the formulae I*1 to I*10 is listed below. For reasons of simplicity, Phe is 1,4-phenylene which is optionally substituted in 2- and/or 3-position with L, and Cyc is 1,4-cyclohexylene. 15 Particularly preferred compounds of the formula I*2, I3, I*5, I*6, I*7, I*9 and I*10 are those of the following formulae: R*-Phe-Z3-G-R** I*2-1 R*-Cyc-Z3-G-R** I*2-2 20 R*-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-R** I*3-1 R*-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-R** I*3-2 R*-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-R** I*3-3 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-G-R** I*5-1 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-G-R** I*5-2 25 P-Sp-G-Z4-Phe-R** I*6-1 P-Sp-G-Z4-Cyc-R** I*6-2 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-R** I*7-1 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-R** I*7-2 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-R** I*7-3 30 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-R** I*7-4 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-G-Sp-P I*9-1 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-G-Sp-P I*9-2 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-Sp-P I*10-1 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-Sp-P I*10-2 35 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-Sp-P I*10-3 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-Sp-P I*11-1 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-Sp-P I*11-2 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-Sp-P I*11-3 P24068 De - 96 - P-Sp-Phe-Z3-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-Sp-P I*11-4 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-Sp-P I*11-5 5 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-Sp-P I*11-6 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-Sp-P I*11-7 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-Z4-Phe-Sp-P I*12-1 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-Z4-Phe-Sp-P I*12-2 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-Z4-Phe-Sp-P I*12-3 10 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-Z4-Phe-Sp-P I*12-4 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Phe-Z4-Cyc-Sp-P I*12-5 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-Z4-Cyc-Sp-P I*12-6 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-Phe-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-Z4-Cyc-Sp-P I*12-7 P-Sp-Phe-Z3-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-Z4-Cyc-Sp-P I*12-8 15 P-Sp-Cyc-Z3-Cyc-Z3-G-Z4-Cyc-Z4-Cyc-Sp-P I*12-9 wherein P, Sp, Z3, Z4 and G have the meanings given for formula I* or one of their preferred meanings as described above and below, R* has one of the meanings of R3 in formula I* which is different from P-Sp-, and R** has one of the meanings of R4 20 in formula I* which is different from P-Sp-. Preferably in the compounds of formulae I*2-1 to I*7-4 R* and R** are independently of each other alkyl or alkoxy with 1 to 12 C atoms, or alkyl or alkoxy with 1 to 12 C atoms and the other is F, Cl or CN. Furthermore -Sp- is preferably alkylene or 25 alkyleneoxy with 1 to 12 C atoms, P is preferably acrylate or methacrylate, and Z3 and Z4 are independently of each other denote - CO-O-, -O-CO- -CH=CH-CO-O-, - O-CO-CH=CH-, -CH=C(CN)-CO-O-, -O-CO-C(CN)=CH-, -CH=N-, -N=CH-, -N=N- or a single bond, more preferably -CO-O-, -O-CO- or a single bond. 30 Preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein G denotes or contains a photoisomerizable group. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein Z3 and/or Z4 independently of each other denote -CH=CH-CO-O-, -O-CO-CH=CH-, - 35 CH=C(CN)-CO-O-, -O-CO-C(CN)=CH-, -CH=N-, -N=CH- or -N=N-. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those containing an isomerizable group selected from stilbene, (1,2-difluoro-2-phenyl-vinyl)-benzene, P24068 De - 97 - cinnamate,^^-cyanocinnamate, 4-phenylbut-3-en-2-one, Schiff base, 2-benzyliden-1- indanone, chalcone, coumarin, chromone, pentalenone or azobenzene. 5 Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein the chiral group G is selected or derived from dianhydrohexitol, preferably isosorbide, isomannide or isoidide, 1,1’-bi-2-naphthol (binol), 1,2-diphenyl-1,2- ethanediol (hydrobenzoin), 2-benzylidene-p-menthan-3-one and menthyl cinnamate 10 ((1R,2S,5R)-5-Methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl (2E)-3-phenyl-2-propenoate). Very preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein the chiral group G is selected of formula A: 15 A 20 wherein X is -CO-O-, -CH=CH-CO-O-, -CH=C(CN)-CO-O-, in each of which the ester O-atom is linked to the furan ring, or -N=N-, q is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, and L has the meaning of formula I* or one of its preferred meanings as given above and below. 25 Formula A includes the following stereoisomers based on the corresponding dianhydrohexitols: 30 i 35 ii P24068 De - 98 - 5 iii 10 wherein X, L and q have the meanings given in formula A, and wherein Ai is based on isosorbide, Aii is based on isomannide and Aiii is based on isoidide. Especially preferred is Ai. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein 15 one or both of Z3 and Z4 independently of each other denote -CH=CH-CO-O-, -O- CO-CH=CH-, -CH=C(CN)-CO-O-, -O-CO-C(CN)=CH-, -CH=N-, -N=CH- or -N=N-, and/or wherein G is of formula A, preferably Ai, and X denotes -CH=CH-CO-O-, - CH=C(CN)-CO-O- or -N=N-. 20 Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein G is of formula A, preferably formula Ai, and X denotes -CH=CH-CO-O-, -CH=C(CN)- CO-O- or -N=N-, very preferably -CH=CH-CO-O-. Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are those wherein 25 the chiral group G is selected from the following formulae C 30 D 35 P24068 De - 99 - 5 E 10 F 15 G 20 wherein X, L and q have the meanings given in formula A or one of the preferred meanings 25 as given above and below, R11 and R12 independently of each other denote -(Z4-A4)l-R4 as defined in formula I*, or R11 and R12 together with the O atoms form a cyclic group or a spirocyclic group which is optionally substituted by a group -(Z4-A4)l-R4 as defined in formula I*, R13 and R14 independently of each other denote R3-(A3-Z3)m- as defined in formula I*, 30 a1 and a2 independently of each other are 0, 1 or 2, and the dashed lines represent a linkage to the adjacent group(s) in formula I*. Preferred compounds of formula I* are selected from the following formulae: 35 P24068 De - 100 - 5 A 10 15 B 20 F 25 30 G 35 wherein R3, R4, Z4, A4, L and q have the meanings given in formula I* or one of the preferred meanings as given above and below, l1 is 0, 1 or 2, R13, R14, a1 and a2 have the meanings given in formula G or one of the preferred meanings as given P24068 De - 101 - above and below, R15 denotes -(Z4-A4)l-R4 as defined in formula I* and X11 and X12 denote -O-CO-CH=CH-. 5 Very preferred compounds of formula I*A are selected from the following subformulae: 10 A1 15 20 A2 25 30 A3 35 P24068 De - 102 - 5 B1 10 15 B2 20 25 B3 30 wherein P, Sp, L and q have the meanings given in formula I* or one of the preferred meanings as given above and below, R* has one of the meanings of R3 in formula I* which is different from P-Sp-, and R** has one of the meanings of R4 in formula I* which is different from P-Sp-. 35 Especially preferred are the compounds of formula I*A3. Further preferred are the stereoisomers of formula I*A, I*B, I*A1, I*A2 and I*A3 wherein the central isosorbide unit is replaced by an isomannide or isoidide unit. P24068 De - 103 - In the compounds of formula I*A, I*B, I*A1, I*A2 and I*A3, P is preferably acrylate or 5 methacrylate, very preferably acrylate, Sp is preferably -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1- or -CO-O-(CH2)p1-,, very preferably -O-(CH2)p1-, wherein the O-atom or CO-group, respectively, is linked to the benzene ring, p1 is an integer from 1 to 6, more preferably 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, and R4 is preferably P-Sp-. 10 Further preferred compounds of formula I* and its subformulae are selected from the following formulae: 15 C1 20 C2 25 D1 30 D2 35 P24068 De - 104 - 5 3 10 4 15 1 20 2 25 30 3 35 4 P24068 De - 105 - 5 E5 10 E6 15 E7 20 25 E8 30 E9 35 P24068 De - 106 - (L)q (L)q P-Sp COO 5 H O 0 10 1 15 2 20 25 3 30 4 35 P24068 De - 108 - wherein P, Sp, R*, R**, L and q have the meanings given in formula I* and I*A1 or one of the preferred meanings as given above and below, R16 and R17 5 independently of each other denote alkyl with 1 to 12, preferably 1 to 6 C atoms, very preferably methyl, ethyl or propyl, and R18 denotes P-Sp-, H or alkyl with 1 to 12, preferably 1 to 6 C atoms, very preferably H. In the compounds of formulae I*C1 to I*G1, P is preferably acrylate or methacrylate, 10 very preferably acrylate, Sp is preferably -O-(CH2)p1-, -O-CO-(CH2)p1- or -CO-O- (CH2)p1-, very preferably -O-(CH2)p1-, wherein the O-atom or CO-group, respectively, is linked to the benzene ring, p1 is an integer from 1 to 6, more preferably 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, R* and R** are preferably, independently of each other, alkyl or alkoxy with 1 to 12, very preferably 1 to 6, C atoms. 15 The compounds of formula IA* can be prepared for example according to or in analogy to the method described in GB 2314839 A. The compounds of formulae I*E1 to I*E15 can be prepared for example according to or in analogy to the method described in WO 02/40614 A1. 20 Preferably the utilized chiral isomerizable compounds have each alone or in combination with each other an absolute value of the helical twisting power (IHTPtotalI) of 20 µm-1 or more, preferably of 40 µm-1 or more, more preferably in the range of 60 µm-1 or more, most preferably in the range of 80 µm-1 or more to 25 260 µm-1 . In case the RM formulation contains two or more chiral isomerizable compounds, these compounds may have the same or opposite twist sense. 30 In a preferred embodiment, the RM formulation contains only one chiral isomerizable compound, very preferably selected from formula I* or its subformulae, which is preferably polymerizable, i.e., which contains at least one group P-Sp-. In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation does not contain any other 35 chiral compounds than those of formula I*. Preferably the proportion of the chiral isomerizable compounds, especially those selected from formula I* or its subformulae, in the RM formulation according to the P24068 De - 109 - present invention as a whole is in the range from 0.1 to 10 % by weight, very preferably in the range from 0.2 to 8.5 % by weight, most preferably in the range 5 from 0.5 to 4 % by weight of total solids In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation contains one or more chiral compounds which are not isomerizable. 10 By adding one or more non-isomerizable chiral compounds it is possible to adjust the central wavelength of the reflection band of the RM formulation. In case the RM formulation contains a chiral isomerizable compound, the additional non- isomerizable chiral compound can have the same twist sense or opposite twist sense than the chiral isomerizable compound. Accordingly the reflection waveband 15 of the RM formulation will be shifted to shorter or longer wavelengths, respectively. In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation contains one or more, preferably exactly one, chiral isomerizable and polymerizable compound, especially selected from formula I* or its subformulae, and additionally contains one or more, 20 preferably exactly one, polymerizable chiral compound which is not isomerizable, and which very preferably has opposite twist sense than the chiral isomerizable and polymerizable compound, and is preferably selected from formula C or its subformulae. 25 In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation according to the present invention additionally comprises one or more chiral compounds which are not polymerizable and not isomerizable. These chiral compounds may be non- mesogenic compounds or mesogenic compounds. 30 The chiral, non-isomerizable compounds can have the same twist sense or opposite twist sense than the chiral isomerizable compound. Thereby it is possible to shift the reflection waveband of the RM formulation to shorter or longer wavelengths as described above. 35 Preferred non-polymerizable and non-isomerizable chiral compounds are selected from the group consisting of compounds of formulae C-I to C-III, P24068 De - 110 - 5 -I 10 -II 15 -III 20 wherein formula C-II and C-III include the respective (S,S) enantiomers, and wherein E and F are each independently 1,4-phenylene or trans-1,4-cyclohexylene, 25 v is 0 or 1, Z0 is -COO-, -OCO-, -CH2CH2- or a single bond, and Rc is alkyl, alkoxy or alkanoyl with 1 to 12 C atoms. Further preferred are the stereoisomers of formula C-II wherein the central isosorbide unit is replaced by an isomannide or isoidide unit. 30 The compounds of formula C-I and their synthesis are described in EP1389199 A1. The compounds of formula C-II and their synthesis are described in WO98/00428 A1. The compounds of formula C-III and their synthesis are described in GB2328207 A. 35 Further preferred additional chiral dopants are e.g. the commercially available R/S- 6011, R/S-5011, R/S-4011, R/S-3011, R/S-2011, R/S-1011, R/S-811 and CB-15 (from Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany). P24068 De - 111 - The amount of the non-polymerizable chiral dopants in the RM formulation is 5 preferably from 0.1 to 10 %, more preferably from 0.5 to 8 % by weight of total solids. The total proportion of the compounds selected from formula D, M, T, A and their subformulae and optionally from formulae C1, C2, C3, D, M, I* and their subformulae, 10 in the RM formulation according to the present invention is preferably from 85 to 100%, more preferably from 85 to 99%, very preferably from 90 to 99% of total solids, i.e., excluding the solvents. In a preferred embodiment the RM formulation additionally comprises one or more 15 additives selected from the group consisting of polymerization initiators, surfactants, stabilisers, catalysts, sensitizers, inhibitors, chain-transfer agents, co-reacting monomers, reactive thinners, surface-active compounds, lubricating agents, wetting agents, dispersing agents, hydrophobing agents, adhesive agents, flow improvers, degassing or defoaming agents, deaerators, diluents, reactive diluents, auxiliaries, 20 colourants, dyes, pigments and nanoparticles. In another preferred embodiment the present invention, the RM mixture and/or RM formulation do not contain a compound with at least one CF3 or CF2 group (PFAS), and very preferably the RM mixture and/or RM formulation do not contain a 25 compound with a polyfluorinated alkyl or aryl group or a perfuorocarbon group. More preferably the RM mixture and/or RM formulation do not contain a compound with a fluorinated aliphatic C atom, most preferably the RM mixture and/or RM formulation do not contain a compound with a fluorinated C atom. The RM mixtures and RM formulations according to this preferred embodiment do thus enable a reduction of 30 perfluorocarbons. The RM mixture and/or RM formulation as described above and below, which do not contain a PFAS, more preferably do not contain a perfluorocarbon compound, very preferably do not contain compound with a polyfluorinated C atom, and most 35 preferably do not contain a compound with a fluorinated C atom, are another object of the invention. P24068 De - 112 - In a preferred embodiment the RM mixure or RM formulation comprises one or more specific antioxidant additives, preferably selected from the Irganox® series, e.g. the 5 commercially available antioxidants Irganox®1076 and Irganox®1010, from Ciba, Switzerland. In another preferred embodiment, the RM formulation comprises a combination of one or more, more preferably of two or more photoinitiators, for example, selected 10 from the commercially available Irgacure® or Darocure® (Ciba AG) series, in particular, Irgacure 127, Irgacure 184, Irgacure 369, Irgacure 651, Irgacure 817, Irgacure 907, Irgacure 1300, Irgacure, Irgacure 2022, Irgacure 2100, Irgacure 2959, or Darcure TPO, further selected from the commercially available OXE02 (Ciba AG), NCI 930, N1919T (Adeka), SPI-03 or SPI-04 (Samyang), TR-PBG 304 or TR-PGB 15 345 (Tronly). The photoinitiator is preferably selected such that it has an absorption maximum which is different from, very preferably at least 15 nm higher or lower than, the absorption maximum of the chiral photoisomerizable compound. 20 The concentration of the polymerization initiator(s) as a whole in the RM mixure or RM formulation is preferably from 0.1 to 6%, very preferably from 0.3 to 5%, more preferably from 0.7 to 4%. 25 In another preferred embodiment the RM mixure or RM formulation optionally comprises one or more additives selected from polymerizable non-mesogenic compounds (reactive thinners). The amount of these additives in the RM formulation is preferably from 0 to 30 %, very preferably from 0 to 25 % of total solids. 30 The reactive thinners used are not only substances which are referred to in the actual sense as reactive thinners, but also auxiliary compounds already mentioned above which contain one or more complementary reactive units, for example hydroxyl, thiol-, or amino groups, via which a reaction with the polymerizable units of the liquid-crystalline compounds can take place. 35 The substances which are usually capable of photopolymerization include, for example, mono-, bi- and polyfunctional compounds containing at least one olefinic double bond. Examples thereof are vinyl esters of carboxylic acids, for example of P24068 De - 113 - lauric, myristic, palmitic and stearic acid, and of dicarboxylic acids, for example of succinic acid, adipic acid, allyl and vinyl ethers and methacrylic and acrylic esters of 5 monofunctional alcohols, for example of lauryl, myristyl, palmityl and stearyl alcohol, and diallyl and divinyl ethers of bifunctional alcohols, for example ethylene glycol and 1,4-butanediol. Also suitable are, for example, methacrylic and acrylic esters of polyfunctional 10 alcohols, in particular those which contain no further functional groups, or at most ether groups, besides the hydroxyl groups. Examples of such alcohols are bifunctional alcohols, such as ethylene glycol, propylene glycol and their more highly condensed representatives, for example diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, tripropylene glycol etc., butanediol, pentanediol, hexanediol, 15 neopentyl glycol, alkoxylated phenolic compounds, such as ethoxylated and propoxylated bisphenols, cyclohexanedimethanol, trifunctional and polyfunctional alcohols, such as glycerol, trimethylolpropane, butanetriol, trimethylolethane, pentaerythritol, ditrimethylolpropane, dipentaerythritol, sorbitol, mannitol, and the corresponding alkoxylated, in particular ethoxylated and propoxylated alcohols. 20 Other suitable reactive thinners are polyester (meth)acrylates, which are the (meth)acrylic ester of polyesterols. Examples of suitable polyesterols are those which can be prepared by esterification 25 of polycarboxylic acids, preferably dicarboxylic acids, using polyols, preferably diols. The starting materials for such hydroxyl-containing polyesters are known to the person skilled in the art. Dicarboxylic acids which can be employed are succinic, glutaric acid, adipic acid, sebacic acid, o-phthalic acid and isomers and hydrogenation products thereof, and esterifiable and transesterifiable derivatives of 30 said acids, for example anhydrides and dialkyl esters. Suitable polyols are the abovementioned alcohols, preferably ethyleneglycol, 1,2- and 1,3-propylene glycol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,6-hexanediol, neopentyl glycol, cyclohexanedimethanol and polyglycols of the ethylene glycol and propylene glycol type. 35 Suitable reactive thinners are furthermore 1,4-divinylbenzene, triallyl cyanurate, acrylic esters of tricyclodecenyl alcohol of the following formula P24068 De - 114 - 5 also known under the name dihydrodicyclopentadienyl acrylate, and the allyl esters of acrylic acid, methacrylic acid and cyanoacrylic acid. 10 Of the reactive thinners which are mentioned by way of example, those containing photopolymerizable groups are used in particular and in view of the abovementioned preferred compositions. This group includes, for example, dihydric and polyhydric alcohols, for example 15 ethylene glycol, propylene glycol and more highly condensed representatives thereof, for example diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, tripropylene glycol etc., butanediol, pentanediol, hexanediol, neopentyl glycol, cyclohexanedimethanol, glycerol, trimethylolpropane, butanetriol, trimethylolethane, pentaerythritol, ditrimethylolpropane, dipentaerythritol, sorbitol, mannitol and the 20 corresponding alkoxylated, in particular ethoxylated and propoxylated alcohols. The group furthermore also includes, for example, alkoxylated phenolic compounds, for example ethoxylated and propoxylated bisphenols. 25 These reactive thinners may furthermore be, for example, epoxide or urethane (meth)acrylates. Epoxide (meth)acrylates are, for example, those as obtainable by the reaction, known to the person skilled in the art, of epoxidized olefins or poly- or diglycidyl 30 ether, such as bisphenol A diglycidyl ether, with (meth)acrylic acid. Urethane (meth)acrylates are, in particular, the products of a reaction, likewise known to the person skilled in the art, of hydroxylalkyl (meth)acrylates with poly- or diisocyanates. 35 Such epoxide and urethane (meth)acrylates are included amongst the compounds listed above as “mixed forms”. P24068 De - 115 - If reactive thinners are used, their amount and properties must be matched to the respective conditions in such a way that, on the one hand, a satisfactory desired 5 effect, for example the desired colour of the composition according to the invention, is achieved, but, on the other hand, the phase behaviour of the liquid-crystalline composition is not excessively impaired. The low-crosslinking (high-crosslinking) liquid-crystalline compositions can be prepared, for example, using corresponding reactive thinners which have a relatively low (high) number of reactive units per 10 molecule. The group of diluents include, for example: C1-C4-alcohols, for example methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, butanol, 15 isobutanol, sec-butanol and, in particular, the C5-C12-alcohols n-pentanol, n- hexanol, n-heptanol, n-octanol, n-nonanol, n-decanol, n-undecanol and n- dodecanol, and isomers thereof, glycols, for example 1,2-ethylene glycol, 1,2- and 1,3-propylene glycol, 1,2-, 2,3- and 1,4-butylene glycol, di- and triethylene glycol and di- and tripropylene glycol, ethers, for example methyl tert-butyl ether, 1,2-ethylene 20 glycol mono- and dimethyl ether, 1,2-ethylene glycol mono- and -diethylether, 3- methoxypropanol, 3-isopropoxypropanol, tetrahydrofuran and dioxane, ketones, for example acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone and diacetone alcohol (4-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone), C1-C5-alkyl esters, for example methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate and amyl acetate, aliphatic and aromatic 25 hydrocarbons, for example pentane, hexane, heptane, octane, isooctane, petroleum ether, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, tetralin, decalin, dimethylnaphthalene, white spirit, Shellsol® and Solvesso® mineral oils, for example gasoline, kerosine, diesel oil and heating oil, but also natural oils, for example olive oil, soya oil, rapeseed oil, linseed oil and sunflower oil. 30 It is of course also possible to use mixtures of these diluents in the compositions according to the invention. So long as there is at least partial miscibility, these diluents can also be mixed with 35 water. Examples of suitable diluents here are C1-C4-alcohols, for example methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, butanol, isobutanol and sec-butanol, glycols, for example 1,2-ethylene glycol, 1,2- and 1,3-propylene glycol, 1,2-, 2,3- and 1,4-butylene glycol, di- and triethylene glycol, and di- and tripropylene glycol, P24068 De - 116 - ethers, for example tetrahydrofuran and dioxane, ketones, for example acetone, methyl ethyl ketone and diacetone alcohol (4-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone), and 5 C1-C4-alkyl esters, for example methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl acetate. The diluents are optionally employed in a proportion of from about 0 to 10.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 5.0% by weight, based on the total weight of the RM formulation. 10 In another preferred embodiment the RM formulation comprises one or more additives selected from the group consisting of antifoams and deaerators (c1)), lubricants and flow auxiliaries (c2)), thermally curing or radiation-curing auxiliaries (c3)), substrate wetting auxiliaries (c4)), wetting and dispersion auxiliaries (c5)), 15 hydrophobicizing agents (c6)), adhesion promoters (c7)) and auxiliaries for promoting scratch resistance (c8)), wherein the additives of groups cannot always strictly be delimited from one another in their action. For example, lubricants and flow auxiliaries often also act as antifoams and/or 20 deaerators and/or as auxiliaries for improving scratch resistance. Radiation-curing auxiliaries can also act as lubricants and flow auxiliaries and/or deaerators and/or as substrate wetting auxiliaries. In individual cases, some of these auxiliaries can also fulfil the function of an adhesion promoter (c8)). 25 Corresponding to the above-said, a certain additive can therefore be classified in a number of the groups c1) to c8) described below. The antifoams in group c1) include silicon-free and silicon-containing polymers. The silicon-containing polymers are, for example, unmodified or modified 30 polydialkylsiloxanes or branched copolymers, comb or block copolymers comprising polydialkylsiloxane and polyether units, the latter being obtainable from ethylene oxide or propylene oxide. The deaerators in group c1) include, for example, organic polymers, for example 35 polyethers and polyacrylates, dialkylpolysiloxanes, in particular dimethylpolysiloxanes, organically modified polysiloxanes, for example arylalkyl- modified polysiloxanes, and fluorosilicones. P24068 De - 117 - The action of the antifoams is essentially based on preventing foam formation or destroying foam that has already formed. Antifoams essentially work by promoting 5 coalescence of finely divided gas or air bubbles to give larger bubbles in the medium to be deaerated, for example the compositions according to the invention, and thus accelerate escape of the gas (of the air). Since antifoams can frequently also be employed as deaerators and vice versa, these additives have been included together under group c1). 10 Such auxiliaries are, for example, commercially available from Tego as TEGO® Foamex 800, TEGO® Foamex 805, TEGO® Foamex 810, TEGO® Foamex 815, TEGO® Foamex 825, TEGO® Foamex 835, TEGO® Foamex 840, TEGO® Foamex 842, TEGO® Foamex 1435, TEGO® Foamex 1488, TEGO® Foamex 1495, TEGO® 15 Foamex 3062, TEGO® Foamex 7447, TEGO® Foamex 8020, Tego® Foamex N, TEGO® Foamex K 3, TEGO® Antifoam 2-18,TEGO® Antifoam 2-18, TEGO® Antifoam 2-57, TEGO® Antifoam 2-80, TEGO® Antifoam 2-82, TEGO® Antifoam 2- 89, TEGO® Antifoam 2-92, TEGO® Antifoam 14, TEGO® Antifoam 28, TEGO® Antifoam 81, TEGO® Antifoam D 90, TEGO® Antifoam 93, TEGO® Antifoam 200, 20 TEGO® Antifoam 201, TEGO® Antifoam 202, TEGO® Antifoam 793, TEGO® Antifoam 1488, TEGO® Antifoam 3062, TEGOPREN® 5803, TEGOPREN® 5852, TEGOPREN® 5863, TEGOPREN® 7008, TEGO® Antifoam 1-60, TEGO® Antifoam 1-62, TEGO® Antifoam 1-85, TEGO® Antifoam 2-67, TEGO® Antifoam WM 20, TEGO® Antifoam 50, TEGO® Antifoam 105, TEGO® Antifoam 730, TEGO® 25 Antifoam MR 1015, TEGO® Antifoam MR 1016, TEGO® Antifoam 1435, TEGO® Antifoam N, TEGO® Antifoam KS 6, TEGO® Antifoam KS 10, TEGO® Antifoam KS 53, TEGO® Antifoam KS 95, TEGO® Antifoam KS 100, TEGO® Antifoam KE 600, TEGO® Antifoam KS 911, TEGO® Antifoam MR 1000, TEGO® Antifoam KS 1100, Tego® Airex 900, Tego® Airex 910, Tego® Airex 931, Tego® Airex 935, Tego® 30 Airex 936, Tego® Airex 960, Tego® Airex 970, Tego® Airex 980, and Tego® Airex 985, and from BYK as BYK®-011, BYK®-019, BYK®-020, BYK®-021, BYK®-022, BYK®-023, BYK®-024, BYK®-025, BYK®-027, BYK®-031, BYK®-032, BYK®-033, BYK®-034, BYK®-035, BYK®-036, BYK®-037, BYK®-045, BYK®-051, BYK®-052, BYK®-053, BYK®-055, BYK®-057, BYK®-065, BYK®-066, BYK®-070, BYK®-080, 35 BYK®-088, BYK®-141 and BYK®-A 530. P24068 De - 118 - The auxiliaries in group c1) are optionally employed in the RM formulation in a proportion of from about 0 to 3.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 2.0% by 5 weight of total solids. In group c2), the lubricants and flow auxiliaries typically include silicon-free, but also silicon-containing polymers, for example polyacrylates or modifiers, low-molecular- weight polydialkylsiloxanes. The modification consists in some of the alkyl groups 10 having been replaced by a wide variety of organic radicals. These organic radicals are, for example, polyethers, polyesters or even long-chain alkyl radicals, the former being used the most frequently. The polyether radicals in the correspondingly modified polysiloxanes are usually 15 built up from ethylene oxide and/or propylene oxide units. Generally, the higher the proportion of these alkylene oxide units in the modified polysiloxane, the more hydrophilic is the resultant product. Such auxiliaries are, for example, commercially available from Tego as TEGO® 20 Glide 100, TEGO® Glide ZG 400, TEGO® Glide 406, TEGO® Glide 410, TEGO® Glide 411, TEGO® Glide 415, TEGO® Glide 420, TEGO® Glide 435, TEGO® Glide 440, TEGO® Glide 450, TEGO® Glide A 115, TEGO® Glide B 1484 (can also be used as antifoam and deaerator), TEGO® Flow ATF, TEGO® Flow 300, TEGO® Flow 460, TEGO® Flow 425 and TEGO® Flow ZFS 460. Suitable radiation-curable 25 lubricants and flow auxiliaries, which can also be used to improve the scratch resistance, are the products TEGO® Rad 2100, TEGO® Rad 2200, TEGO® Rad 2500, TEGO® Rad 2600 and TEGO® Rad 2700, which are likewise obtainable from TEGO. 30 Such-auxiliaries are available, for example, from BYK as BYK®-300 BYK®-306, BYK®-307, BYK®-310, BYK®-320, BYK®-333, BYK®-341, Byk® 354, Byk®361, Byk®361N, BYK®388. The auxiliaries in group c2) are optionally employed in the formulation in a 35 proportion of from about 0 to 3.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 2.0% by weight of total solids. P24068 De - 119 - In group c3), the radiation-curing auxiliaries include, in particular, polysiloxanes having terminal double bonds which are, for example, a constituent of an acrylate 5 group. Such auxiliaries can be crosslinked by actinic or, for example, electron radiation. These auxiliaries generally combine a number of properties together. In the uncrosslinked state, they can act as antifoams, deaerators, lubricants and flow auxiliaries and/or substrate wetting auxiliaries, while, in the crosslinked state, they increase, in particular, the scratch resistance, for example of coatings or films which 10 can be produced using the compositions according to the invention. The improvement in the gloss properties, for example of precisely those coatings or films, is regarded essentially as a consequence of the action of these auxiliaries as antifoams, deaerators and/or lubricants and flow auxiliaries (in the uncrosslinked state). 15 Examples of suitable radiation-curing auxiliaries are the products TEGO® Rad 2100, TEGO® Rad 2200, TEGO® Rad 2500, TEGO® Rad 2600 and TEGO® Rad 2700 available from TEGO and the product BYK®-371 available from BYK. 20 Thermally curing auxiliaries in group c3) contain, for example, primary OH groups which are able to react with isocyanate groups, for example of the binder. Examples of thermally curing auxiliaries which can be used are the products BYK®- 370, BYK®-373 and BYK®-375 available from BYK. 25 The auxiliaries in group c3) are optionally employed in the RM formulation in a proportion of from about 0 to 5.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 3.0% by weight of total solids. 30 The substrate wetting auxiliaries in group c4) serve, in particular, to increase the wettability of the substrate to be printed or coated, for example, by printing inks or coating compositions, for example compositions according to the invention. The generally attendant improvement in the lubricant and flow behaviour of such printing inks or coating compositions has an effect on the appearance of the finished (for 35 example crosslinked) print or coating. A wide variety of such auxiliaries are commercially available, for example from Tego as TEGO® Wet KL 245, TEGO® Wet 250, TEGO® Wet 260 and TEGO® Wet ZFS P24068 De - 120 - 453 and from BYK as BYK®-306, BYK®-307, BYK®-310, BYK®-333, BYK®-344, BYK®-345, BYK®-346 and Byk®-348. 5 The auxiliaries in group c4) are optionally employed in a proportion of from about 0 to 3.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 1.5% by weight, based on the total weight of the liquid-crystalline composition. 10 The wetting and dispersion auxiliaries in group c5) serve, in particular, to prevent the flooding and floating and the sedimentation of pigments and are therefore, if necessary, suitable in particular in pigmented compositions according to the invention. 15 These auxiliaries stabilize pigment dispersions essentially through electrostatic repulsion and/or steric hindrance of the pigment particles containing these additives, where, in the latter case, the interaction of the auxiliary with the ambient medium (for example binder) plays a major role. 20 Since the use of such wetting and dispersion auxiliaries is common practice, for example in the technical area of printing inks and paints, the selection of a suitable auxiliary of this type generally does not present the person skilled in the art with any difficulties, if they are used. 25 Such wetting and dispersion auxiliaries are commercially available, for example from Tego, as TEGO® Dispers 610, TEGO® Dispers 610 S, TEGO® Dispers 630, TEGO® Dispers 700, TEGO® Dispers 705, TEGO® Dispers 710, TEGO® Dispers 720 W, TEGO® Dispers 725 W, TEGO® Dispers 730 W, TEGO® Dispers 735 W and TEGO® Dispers 740 W and from BYK as Disperbyk®, Disperbyk®-107, 30 Disperbyk®-108, Disperbyk®-110, Disperbyk®-111, Disperbyk®-115, Disperbyk®- 130, Disperbyk®-160, Disperbyk®-161, Disperbyk®-162, Disperbyk®-163, Disperbyk®-164, Disperbyk®-165, Disperbyk®-166, Disperbyk®-167, Disperbyk®- 170, Disperbyk®-174, Disperbyk®-180, Disperbyk®-181, Disperbyk®-182, Disperbyk®-183, Disperbyk®-184, Disperbyk®-185, Disperbyk®-190, Anti-Terra®- 35 U, Anti-Terra®-U 80, Anti-Terra®-P, Anti-Terra®-203, Anti-Terra®-204, Anti-Terra®- 206, BYK®-151, BYK®-154, BYK®-155, BYK®-P 104 S, BYK®-P 105, Lactimon®, Lactimon®-WS and Bykumen®. P24068 De - 121 - The amount of the auxiliaries in group c5) used on the mean molecular weight of the auxiliary. In any case, a preliminary experiment is therefore advisable, but this can 5 be accomplished simply by the person skilled in the art. Another preferred group of auxiliaries, which can be allocated to group c2), c4) or c5), includes wetting-, flow- and leveling agents, in particular based on non-ionic fluorosurfactants, which are commercially available from Synthomer under the 10 PolyfoxTM series, for example PolyfoxTMPF-656. The hydrophobicizing agents in group c6) can be used to give water-repellent properties to prints or coatings produced, for example, using compositions according to the invention. This prevents or at least greatly suppresses swelling due to water 15 absorption and thus a change in, for example, the optical properties of such prints or coatings. In addition, when the composition is used, for example, as a printing ink in offset printing, water absorption can thereby be prevented or at least greatly reduced. 20 Such hydrophobicizing agents are commercially available, for example, from Tego as Tego® Phobe WF, Tego® Phobe 1000, Tego® Phobe 1000 S, Tego® Phobe 1010, Tego® Phobe 1030, Tego® Phobe 1010, Tego® Phobe 1010, Tego® Phobe 1030, Tego® Phobe 1040, Tego® Phobe 1050, Tego® Phobe 1200, Tego® Phobe 1300, Tego® Phobe 1310 and Tego® Phobe 1400. 25 The auxiliaries in group c6) are optionally employed in the RM formulation in a proportion of from about 0 to 5.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 3.0% by weight of total solids. 30 Adhesion promoters from group c7) serve to improve the adhesion of two interfaces in contact. It is directly evident from this that essentially the only fraction of the adhesion promoter that is effective is that located at one or the other or at both interfaces. If, for example, it is desired to apply liquid or pasty printing inks, coating compositions or paints to a solid substrate, this generally means that the adhesion 35 promoter must be added directly to the latter or the substrate must be pre-treated with the adhesion promoters (also known as priming), i.e. this substrate is given modified chemical and/or physical surface properties. P24068 De - 122 - If the substrate has previously been primed with a primer, this means that the interfaces in contact are that of the primer on the one hand and of the printing ink or 5 coating composition or paint on the other hand. In this case, not only the adhesion properties between the substrate and the primer, but also between the substrate and the printing ink or coating composition or paint play a part in adhesion of the overall multilayer structure on the substrate. 10 Adhesion promoters in the broader sense which may be mentioned are also the substrate wetting auxiliaries already listed under group c4), but these generally do not have the same adhesion promotion capacity. In view of the widely varying physical and chemical natures of substrates and of 15 printing inks, coating compositions and paints intended, for example, for their printing or coating, the multiplicity of adhesion promoter systems is not surprising. Adhesion promoters based on silanes are, for example, 3- aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3- 20 aminopropylmethyldiethoxysilane, N-aminoethyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, N- aminoethyl-3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, N-methyl-3- aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-ureidopropyltriethoxysilane, 3- methacryloyloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidyloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3- mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-chloropropyltrimethoxysilane and 25 vinyltrimethoxysilane. These and other silanes are commercially available from Hüls, for example under the tradename DYNASILAN®. Corresponding technical information from the manufacturers of such additives should generally be used or the person skilled in the art can obtain this information 30 in a simple manner through corresponding preliminary experiments. However, if these additives are to be added as auxiliaries from group c7) to the RM formulation according to the invention, their proportion optionally corresponds to from about 0 to 5.0% by weight of total solids. These concentration data serve 35 merely as guidance, since the amount and identity of the additive are determined in each individual case by the nature of the substrate and of the printing/coating composition. Corresponding technical information is usually available from the manufacturers of such additives for this case or can be determined in a simple P24068 De - 123 - manner by the person skilled in the art through corresponding preliminary experiments. 5 The auxiliaries for improving the scratch resistance in group c8) include, for example, the abovementioned products TEGO® Rad 2100, TEGO® Rad 2200, TEGO® Rad 2500, TEGO® Rad 2600 and TEGO® Rad 2700, which are available from Tego. 10 For these auxiliaries, the amount data given for group c3) are likewise suitable, i.e. these additives are optionally employed in a proportion of from about 0 to 5.0% by weight, preferably from about 0 to 3.0% by weight, based on the total weight of the liquid-crystalline composition. 15 Examples which may be mentioned of light, heat and/or oxidation stabilizers are the following: alkylated monophenols, such as 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 2-tert-butyl-4,6- 20 dimethylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-ethylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-n-butylphenol, 2,6- di-tert-butyl-4-isobutylphenol, 2,6-dicyclopentyl-4-methylphenol, 2-(α- methylcyclohexyl)-4,6-dimethylphenol, 2,6-dioctadecyl-4-methylphenol, 2,4,6- tricyclohexylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methoxymethylphenol, nonylphenols which have a linear or branched side chain, for example 2,6-dinonyl-4-methylphenol, 2,4- 25 dimethyl-6-(1′-methylundec-1′-yl)phenol, 2,4-dimethyl-6-(1′-methylheptadec-1′- yl)phenol, 2,4-dimethyl-6-(1′-methyltridec-1′-yl)phenol and mixtures of these compounds, alkylthiomethylphenols, such as 2,4-dioctylthiomethyl-6-tert- butylphenol, 2,4-dioctylthiomethyl-6-methylphenol, 2,4-dioctylthiomethyl-6- ethylphenol and 2,6-didodecylthiomethyl-4-nonylphenol, 30 Hydroquinones and alkylated hydroquinones, such as 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4- methoxyphenol, 2,5-di-tert-butylhydroquinone, 2,5-di-tert-amylhydrocrainone, 2,6- diphenyl-4-octadecyloxyphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butylhydroquinone, 2,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxyanisole, 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyanisole, 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl 35 stearate and bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)adipate, P24068 De - 124 - Tocopherols, such as α-tocopherol, β-tocopherol, γ-tocopherol, δ-tocopherol and mixtures of these compounds, and tocopherol derivatives, such as tocopheryl 5 acetate, succinate, nicotinate and polyoxyethylenesuccinate (“tocofersolate”), hydroxylated diphenyl thioethers, such as 2,2′-thiobis(6-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol), 2,2′-thiobis(4-octylphenol), 4,4′-thiobis(6-tert-butyl-3-methylphenol), 4,4′-thiobis(6- tert-butyl-2-methylphenol), 4,4′-thiobis(3,6-di-sec-amylphenol) and 4,4′-bis(2,6- 10 dimethyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)disulfide, Alkylidenebisphenols, such as 2,2′-methylenebis(6-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol), 2,2′- methylenebis(6-tert-butyl-4-ethylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis[4-methyl-6-(α- methylcyclohexyl)phenol], 2,2′-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-cyclohexylphenol), 2,2′- 15 methylenebis(6-nonyl-4-methylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis(4,6-di-tert-butylphenol), 2,2-ethylidenebis(4,6-di-tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-ethylidenebis(6-tert-butyl-4- isobutylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis[6-(α-methylbenzyl)-4-nonylphenol], 2,2′- methylenebis[6-(α,α-dimethylbenzyl)-4-nonylphenol], 4,4′-methylenebis(2,6-di-tert- butylphenol), 4,4′-methylenebis(6-tert-butyl-2-methylphenol), 1,1-bis(5-tert-butyl-4- 20 hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)butane, 2,6-bis(3-tert-butyl-5-methyl-2-hydroxybenzyl)-4- methylphenol, 1,1,3-tris(5-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)butane, 1,1-bis(5-tert- butyl-4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)-3-n-dodecyl-mercaptobutane, ethylene glycol bis[3,3-bis(3′-tert-butyl-4′-hydroxyphenyl)butyrate], bis(3-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-5- methylphenyl)dicyclopentadiene, bis[2-(3′-tert-butyl-2′-hydroxy-5′-methylbenzyl)-6- 25 tert-butyl-4-methylphenyl]terephthalate, 1,1-bis(3,5-dimethyl-2- hydroxyphenyl)butane, 2,2-bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(5- tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)-4-n-dodecyl-mercaptobutane and 1,1,5,5- tetrakis(5-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)pentane, 30 O-, N- and S-benzyl compounds, such as 3,5,3′,5′-tetra-tert-butyl-4,4′- dihydroxydibenzyl ether, octadecyl 4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethylbenzylmercaptoacetate, tridecyl 4-hydroxy-3,5-di-tert-butylbenzylmercaptoacetate, tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxybenzyl)amine, bis(4-tert-butyl-3-hydroxy-2,6- dimethylbenzyl)dithioterephthalate, bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)sulfide and 35 isooctyl-3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzylmercaptoacetate, P24068 De - 125 - aromatic hydroxybenzyl compounds, such as 1,3,5-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxybenzyl)-2,4,6-trimethyl-benzene, 1,4-bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)- 5 2,3,5,6-tetramethyl-benzene and 2,4,6-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)phenol, Triazine compounds, such as 2,4-bis(octylmercapto)-6-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxyanilino)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-octylmercapto-4,6-bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxyanilino)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-octylmercapto-4,6-bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- 10 hydroxyphenoxy)-1,3,5-triazine, 2,4,6-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenoxy)-1,2,3- triazine, 1,3,5-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)isocyanurate, 1,3,5-tris(4-tert- butyl-3-hydroxy-2,6-dimethylbenzyl)isocyanurate, 2,4,6-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxyphenylethyl)-1,3,5-triazine, 1,3,5-tris-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxyphenylpropionyl)hexahydro-1,3,5-triazine, 1,3,5-tris(3,5-dicyclohexyl-4- 15 hydroxybenzyl)isocyanurate and 1,3,5-tris(2-hydroxyethyl)isocyanurate, Benzylphosphonates, such as dimethyl 2,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxybenzylphosphonate, diethyl 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzylphosphonate, dioctadecyl 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzylphosphonate and dioctadecyl 5-tert- 20 butyl-4-hydroxy-3-methylbenzylphosphonate, Acylaminophenols, such as 4-hydroxylauroylanilide, 4-hydroxystearoylanilide and octyl N-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)carbamate, 25 Propionic and acetic esters, for example of monohydric or polyhydric alcohols, such as methanol, ethanol, n-octanol, i-octanol, octadecanol, 1,6-hexanediol, 1,9- nonanediol, ethylene glycol, 1,2-propanediol, neopentyl glycol, thiodiethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, pentaerythritol, tris(hydroxyethyl)isocyanurate, N,N′-bis(hydroxyethyl)oxalamide, 3-thiaundecanol, 3-thiapentadecanol, 30 trimethylhexanediol, trimethylolpropane and 4-hydroxymethyl-1-phospha-2,6,7- trioxabicyclo[2.2.2]-octane, Propionamides based on amine derivatives, such as N,N′-bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxyphenylpropionyl)hexamethylenediamine, N,N′-bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- 35 hydroxyphenylpropionyl)trimethylenediamine and N,N′-bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxyphenylpropionyl)hydrazine, P24068 De - 126 - Ascorbic acid (Vitamin C) and ascorbic acid derivatives, such as ascorbyl palmitate, laurate and stearate, and ascorbyl sulfate and phosphate, 5 Antioxidants based on amine compounds, such as N,N′-diisopropyl-p- phenylenediamine, N,N′-di-sec-butyl-p-phenylenediamine, N,N′-bis(1,4- dimethylpentyl)-p-phenylenediamine, N,N′-bis(1-ethyl-3-methylpentyl)-p- phenylenediamine, N,N′-bis(1-methylheptyl)-p-phenylenediamine, N,N′-dicyclohexyl- 10 p-phenylenediamine, N,N′-diphenyl-p-phenylenediamine, N,N′-bis(2-naphthyl)-p- phenylenediamine, N-isopropyl-N′-phenyl-p-phenylenediamine, N-(1,3- dimethylbutyl)-N′-phenyl-p-phenylenediamine, N-(1-methylheptyl)-N′-phenyl-p- phenylenediamine, N-cyclohexyl-N′-phenyl-p-phenylenediamine, 4-(p- toluenesulfamoyl)diphenylamine, N,N′-dimethyl-N,N′-di-sec-butyl-p- 15 phenylenediamine, diphenylamine, N-allyldiphenylamine, 4- isopropoxydiphenylamine, N-phenyl-1-naphthylamine, N-(4-tert-octylphenyl)-1- naphthylamine, N-phenyl-2-naphthylamine, octyl-substituted diphenylamine, such as p,p′-di-tert-octyldiphenylamine, 4-n-butylaminophenol, 4-butyrylaminophenol, 4- nonanoylaminophenol, 4-dodecanoylaminophenol, 4-octadecanoylaminophenol, 20 bis[4-methoxyphenyl)amine, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-dimethylaminomethylphenol, 2,4- diaminodiphenylmethane, 4,4′-diaminodiphenylmethane, N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyl-4,4′- diaminodiphenylmethane, 1,2-bis[(2-methylphenyl)amino]ethane, 1,2- bis(phenylamino)propane, (o-tolyl)biguanide, bis[4-(1′,3′-dimethylbutyl)phenyl]amine, tert-octyl-substituted N-phenyl-1-naphthylamine, a mixture of mono- and dialkylated 25 tert-butyl/tert-octyldiphenylamine, a mixture of mono- and dialkylated nonyldiphenylamine, a mixture of mono- and dialkylated dodecyldiphenylamine, a mixture of mono- and dialkylated isopropyl/isohexyldiphenylamine, a mixture of mono- and dialkylated tert-butyldiphenylamine, 2,3-dihydro-3,3-dimethyl-4H-1,4- benzothiazine, phenothiazine, a mixture of mono- and dialkylated tert-butyl/tert- 30 octylphenothiazine, a mixture of mono- and dialkylated tert-octylphenothiazine, N- allylphenothiazine, N,N,N′,N′-tetraphenyl-1,4-diaminobut-2-ene, N,N-bis(2,2,6,6- tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)hexamethylenediamine, bis(2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4- yl)sebacate, 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-one and 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-ol, 35 Phosphines, Phosphites and phosphonites, such as triphenylphosnine triphenylphosphite, diphenyl alkyl phosphite, phenyl dialkyl phosphite, tris(nonylphenyl)phosphite, trilauryl phosphite, trioctadecyl phosphite, distearyl pentaerythritol diphosphite, tris(2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl)phosphite, diisodecyl P24068 De - 127 - pentaerythritol diphosphite, bis(2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl)pentaerythritol diphosphite, bis(2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenyl)pentaerythritol diphosphite, diisodecyloxy 5 pentaerythritol diphosphite, bis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl)pentaerythritol diphosphite, bis(2,4,6-tris(tert-butylphenyl))pentaerythritol diphosphite, tristearyl sorbitol triphosphite, tetrakis(2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl)4,4′-biphenylenediphosphonite, 6-isooctyloxy-2,4,8,10-tetra-tert-butyl-12H-dibenz[d,g]-1,3,2-dioxaphosphocine, 6- fluoro-2,4,8,10-tetra-tert-butyl-12-methyl-dibenz[d,g]-1,3,2-dioxaphosphocine, 10 bis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl)methyl phosphite and bis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6- methylphenyl)ethyl phosphite, 2-(2′-Hydroxyphenyl)benzotriazoles, such as 2-(2′-hydroxy-5′- methylphenyl)benzotriazole, 2-(3′,5′-di-tert-butyl-2′-hydroxyphenyl)benzotriazole, 2- 15 (5′-tert-butyl-2′-hydroxyphenyl)benzotriazole, 2-(2′-hydroxy-5′-(1,1,3,3- tetramethylbutyl)phenyl)benzotriazole, 2-(3′,5′-di-tert-butyl-2′-hydroxyphenyl)-5- chlorobenzotriazole, 2-(3′-tert-butyl-2′-hydroxy-5′-methylphenyl)-5- chlorobenzotriazole, 2-(3′-sec-butyl-5′-tert-butyl-2′-hydroxyphenyl)benzotriazole, 2- (2′-hydroxy-4′-octyloxyphenyl)benzotriazole, 2-(3′,5′-di-tert-amyl-2′- 20 hydroxyphenyl)benzotriazole, 2-(3,5′-bis-(α,α-dimethylbenzyl)-2′- hydroxyphenyl)benzotriazole, a mixture of 2-(3′-tert-butyl-2′-hydroxy-5′-(2- octyloxycarbonylethyl)phenyl)-5-chlorobenzotriazole, 2-(3′-tert-butyl-5′-[2-(2- ethylhexyloxy)carbonylethyl]-2′-hydroxy phenyl)-5-chlorobenzotriazole, 2-(3′-tert- butyl-2′-hydroxy-5′-(2-methoxycarbonylethyl)phenyl)-5-chlorobenzotriazole, 2-(3′- 25 tert-butyl-2′-hydroxy-5′-(2-methoxycarbonylethyl)phenyl)benzotriazole, 2-(3′-tert- butyl-2′-hydroxy-5′-(2-octyloxycarbonylethyl)phenyl)benzotriazole, 2-(3′-tert-butyl-5′- [2-(2-ethylhexyloxy)carbonylethyl]-2′-hydroxy phenyl)benzotriazole, 2-(3′-dodecyl-2′- hydroxy-5′-methylphenyl)benzotriazole and 2-(3′-tert-butyl-2′-hydroxy-5′-(2- isooctyloxycarbonylethyl)phenyl benzotriazole, 2,2′-methylenebis[4-(1,1,3,3- 30 tetramethylbutyl)-6-benzotriazol-2-ylphenol]; the product of complete esterification of 2-[3′-tert-butyl-5′-(2-methoxycarbonylethyl)-2′-hydroxyphenyl]-2H-benzotriazole with polyethylene glycol 300; sulfur-containing peroxide scavengers and sulfur-containing antioxidants, such as 35 esters of 3,3′-thiodipropionic acid, for example the lauryl, stearyl, myristyl and tridecyl esters, mercaptobenzimidazole and the zinc salt of 2- mercaptobenzimidazole, dibutylzinc dithiocarbamates, dioctadecyl disulfide and pentaerythritol tetrakis(β-dodecylmercapto)propionate, P24068 De - 128 - 2-hydroxybenzophenones, such as the 4-hydroxy, 4-methoxy, 4-octyloxy, 4- 5 decycloxy, 4-dodecyloxy, 4-benzyloxy, 4,2′,4′-trihydroxy and 2′-hydroxy-4,4′- dimethoxy derivatives, Esters of unsubstituted and substituted benzoic acids, such as 4-tert-butylphenyl salicylate, phenyl salicylate, octylphenyl salicylate, dibenzoylresorcinol, bis(4-tert- 10 butylbenzoyl)resorcinol, benzoylresorcinol, 2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxybenzoate, hexadecyl-3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzoate, octadecyl-3,5-di- tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzoate and 2-methyl-4,6-di-tert-butylphenyl-3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- hydroxybenzoate, 15 Acrylates, such as ethyl α-cyano-β,β-diphenylacrylate, isooctyl α-cyano-β,β- diphenylacrylate, methyl α-methoxycarbonylcinnamate, methyl α-cyano-β-methyl-p- methoxycinnamate, butyl-α-cyano-β-methyl-p-methoxycinnamate and methyl-α- methoxycarbonyl-p-methoxycinnamate, sterically hindered amines, such as bis(2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)sebacate, bis(2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4- 20 yl)succinate, bis(1,2,2,6,6-pentamethylpiperidin-4-yl)sebacate, bis(1-octyloxy- 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)sebacate, bis(1,2,2,6,6-pentamethylpiperidin-4-yl)- n-butyl-3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzylmalonate, the condensation product of 1-(2- hydroxyethyl)-2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-hydroxypiperidine and succinic acid, the condensation product of N,N′-bis(2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4- 25 yl)hexamethylenediamine and 4-tert-octylamino-2,6-dichloro-1,3,5-triazine, tris(2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)nitrilotriacetate, tetrakis(2,2,6,6- tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)1,2,3,4-butanetetracarboxylate, 1,1′-(1,2- ethylene)bis(3,3,5,5-tetramethylpiperazinone), 4-benzoyl-2,2,6,6- tetramethylpiperidine, 4-stearyloxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, bis(1,2,2,6,6- 30 pentamethylpiperidin-4-yl)2-n-butyl-2-(2-hydroxy-3,5-di-tert-butylbenzyl)malonate, 3- n-octyl-7,7,9,9-tetramethyl-1,3,8-triazaspiro[4.5]decane-2,4-dione, bis(1-octyloxy- 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)sebacate, bis(1-octyloxy-2,2,6,6- tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)succinate, the condensation product of N,N′-bis(2,2,6,6- tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)hexamethylenediamine and 4-morpholino-2,6-dichloro- 35 1,3,5-triazine, the condensation product of 2-chloro-4,6-bis(4-n-butylamino-2,2,6,6- tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)-1,3,5-triazine and 1,2-bis(3-aminopropylamino)ethane, the condensation product of 2-chloro-4,6-di(4-n-butylamino-1,2,2,6,6- pentamethylpiperidin-4-yl)-1,3,5-triazine and 1,2-bis(3-aminopropylamino)ethane, 8- P24068 De - 129 - acetyl-3-dodecyl-7,7,9,9-tetramethyl-1,3,8-triazaspiro[4.5]-decane-2,4-dione, 3- dodecyl-1-(2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, 3-dodecyl-1- 5 (1,2,2,6,6-pentamethylpiperidin-4-yl)pyrrolidine-2,5-dione, a mixture of 4- hexadecyloxy- and 4-stearyloxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine, the condensation product of N,N′-bis(2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)hexamethylenediamine and 4- cyclohexylamino-2,6-dichloro-1,3,5-triazine, the condensation product of 1,2-bis(3- aminopropylamino)ethane and 2,4,6-trichloro-1,3,5-triazine, 4-butylamino-2,2,6,6- 10 tetramethylpiperidine, N-(2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-4-yl)-n-dodecylsuccinimide, N- (1,2,2,6,6-pentamethylpiperidin-4-yl)-n-dodecylsuccinimide, 2-undecyl-7,7,9,9- tetramethyl-1-oxa-3,8-diaza-4-oxo-spiro[4.5]-decane, the condensation product of 7,7,9,9-tetramethyl-2-cycloundecyl-1-oxa-3,8-diaza-4-oxospiro-[4.5]decane and epichlorohydrin, the condensation products of 4-amino-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 15 with tetramethylolacetylenediureas and poly(methoxypropyl-3-oxy)-[4(2,2,6,6- tetramethyl)piperidinyl]-siloxane, Oxalamides, such as 4,4′-dioctyloxyoxanilide, 2,2′-diethoxyoxanilide, 2,2′-dioctyloxy- 5,5′-di-tert-butoxanilide, 2,2′-didodecyloxy-5,5′-di-tert-butoxanilide, 2-ethoxy-2′- 20 ethyloxanilide, N,N′-bis(3-dimethylaminopropyl)oxalamide, 2-ethoxy-5-tert-butyl-2′- ethoxanilide and its mixture with 2-ethoxy-2′-ethyl-5,4′-di-tert-butoxanilide, and mixtures of ortho-, para-methoxy-disubstituted oxanilides and mixtures of ortho- and para-ethoxy-disubstituted oxanilides, and 25 2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)-1,3,5-triazines, such as 2,4,6-tris-(2-hydroxy-4-octyloxyphenyl)- 1,3,5-triazine, 2-(2-hydroxy-4-octyloxyphenyl)-4,6-bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5- triazine, 2-(2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)-4,6-bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine, 2,4- bis(2-hydroxy-4-propyloxyphenyl)-6-(2,4-dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-(2- hydroxy-4-octyloxyphenyl)-4,6-bis(4-methylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-(2-hydroxy-4- 30 dodecyloxyphenyl)-4,6-bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-(2-hydroxy-4- tridecyloxyphenyl)-4,6-bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-[2-hydroxy-4-(2- hydroxy-3-butyloxypropoxy)phenyl]-4,6-bis(2,4-dimethyl)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-[2- hydroxy-4-(2-hydroxy-3-octyloxypropoxy)phenyl]-4,6-bis(2,4-dimethyl)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-[4-(dodecyloxy/tridecyloxy-2-hydroxypropoxy)-2-hydroxyphenyl]-4,6-bis(2,4- 35 dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-[2-hydroxy-4-(2-hydroxy-3- dodecyloxypropoxy)phenyl]-4,6-bis-(2,4-dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-(2- hydroxy-4-hexyloxyphenyl)-4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazine, 2-(2-hydroxy-4- methoxyphenyl)-4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazine, 2,4,6-tris[2-hydroxy-4-(3-butoxy-2- P24068 De - 130 - hydroxypropoxy)phenyl]-1,3,5-triazine and 2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)-4-(4- methoxyphenyl)-6-phenyl-1,3,5-triazine. 5 Preferably, the RM mixture or RM formulation comprises one or more components selected from the group consisting of the following components or any combination thereof: a) one or more multi – or direactive polymerizable mesogenic compounds, 10 preferably selected from compounds of formula D and its subformulae, and/or b) one or more monoreactive polymerizable mesogenic compounds, preferably selected from compounds of formula M and its subformulae, and/or c) one or more polymerizable mesogenic compounds selected from compounds of formula T and A and their subformulae, and/or 15 d) one or more polymerizable chiral compounds, preferably selected from formula C or its subformulae, and/or e) one or more chiral isomerizable compounds, which can be polymerizable or non-polymerizable, preferably selected from formula I*, f) one or more non-polymerizable and non-isomerizable chiral compounds, 20 preferably selected from formulae C-I, C-II and C-III, and/or g) one or more photoinitiators, and/or h) one or more antioxidative additives, and/or i) one or more adhesion promotors, and/or j) one or more surfactants, and/or 25 k) one or more mono-, di- or multireactive polymerizable non-mesogenic compounds, and/or l) one or more dyes showing an absorption maximum at the wavelength used to initiate photo polymerization, and/or m) one or more chain transfer agents, and/or 30 n) one or more (UV) stabilizers, and/or o) one or more lubricants and flow auxiliaries, and p) one or more diluents, and/or q) a non-polymerizable nematic component, and r) one or more organic solvents, at least one of which is selected from formulae 35 S1 and S2. More preferably, the RM mixture or RM formulation comprises: 1) one or more compounds of formula T or A, or their preferred subformulae, and P24068 De - 131 - 2) optionally one or more, preferably two or more, direactive polymerizable mesogenic compounds, preferably selected from formula Da-1, 5 3) optionally one or more, preferably two or more, monoreactive polymerizable mesogenic compounds, preferably selected from formulae M-1, M-4, M-6 and M-8 to M10, and/or 4) optionally one or more polymerizable chiral compounds, preferably selected from formulae C or its subformulae, and/or 10 5) optionally one or more chiral isomerizable compounds, preferably selected from formula I*, more preferably from formula I*A, or their corresponding preferred subformulae, and/or 6) optionally one or more non-polymerizable and non-isomerizable chiral compounds, preferably selected from formulae C-I, C-II and C-III, and/or 15 7) optionally one or more antioxidative additives, and/or 8) optionally one or more photoinitiators, and 9) one or more organic solvents, at least one of which is selected from formulae S1 and S2. or any combination of the aforementioned components 1) to 9), provided that 20 component 9) and at least one of components 1) to 3) are present. The RM mixtures and RM formulations can be prepared in a manner conventional per se, for example by mixing one or more of the above-mentioned RMs as defined above, and optionally with further additives and dissolving these RMs and additives 25 in a solvent or solvent blend. The invention further relates to a process of preparing a polymer or polymer film from an RM formulation as described above and below, comprising the steps of depositing a layer of the RM formulation onto a substrate, optionally removing the 30 solvents, optionally annealing the layer containing the RMs, preferably aligning the RMs into uniform orientation, and polymerizing the RMs, preferably at a temperature where the RMs exhibit a liquid crystal phase, and wherein the RM formulation is preferably deposited onto the substrate by a printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing. 35 Preferably the RMs are aligned into uniform orientation. Further preferably alignment and polymerization of the RMs are carried out at a temperature where the RMs or P24068 De - 132 - the RM mixture exhibit a liquid crystal phase, preferably a nematic or a cholesteric (chiral nematic) phase. 5 A preferred embodiment of the invention relates to a process of preparing a polymer film, comprising, preferably consisting of, the steps of - depositing a layer of an RM formulation as described above and below onto a substrate, which is optionally provided with an alignment layer, preferably by a 10 printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing, - removing the solvents, - optionally annealing the RM layer (i.e., without solvents), preferably at a temperature where the RM mixture exhibit a nematic or cholesteric phase, - irradiating the RM layer with actinic radiation, preferably with UV radiation, 15 causing polymerization of the RMs and formation of a polymer film, - optionally removing the polymer film from the substrate. In another preferred embodiment of the present invention, especially if the RM formulation contains a photoisomerizable chiral compound which is preferably also 20 polymerizable as described above and below, the process of preparing the polymer film comprises two UV irradiation steps, and more precisely comprises, preferably consists of, the steps of - depositing a layer of the RM formulation as described above and below onto a substrate, which is optionally provided with an alignment layer, preferably by a 25 printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing, - removing the solvents, - optionally annealing the RM layer (i.e., without solvents), preferably at a temperature where the RM mixture is in the cholesteric phase, - a first step of irradiation of the RM layer with actinic radiation, preferably with UV 30 radiation, in air (1st UV step), - optionally annealing the RM layer, preferably at a temperature where the RM mixture is in the cholesteric phase, and - a second step of irradiation of the RM layer with actinic radiation, preferably with UV radiation, in an inert gas atmosphere (2nd UV step), 35 - optionally removing the formed polymer film from the substrate. The invention further relates to a polymer or polymer film obtainable by one of the processes as described above and below. P24068 De - 133 - Preferably in the processes according to the present invention all printing, irradiation 5 or UV exposure steps are carried out at room temperature. In case of the two-step irradiation process according to the second preferred embodiment, the first irradiation or 1st UV step causes photoisomerization of the chiral compound comprising the photoisomerizable group and provides the chiral 10 structure with the biased helical pitch. The second irradiation or 2nd UV step causes photopolymerization of the polymerizable mesogenic compounds and thereby fixes the chiral structure. This process can be advantageously used to obtain a chiral pitch gradient in the film thickness direction, wherein the chiral rotation angle increases or decreases incrementally through the film thickness. 15 After the RM formulation is deposited onto the substrate, the solvents are evaporated off before polymerization. In most cases, it is suitable to heat the mixture in order to facilitate the evaporation of the solvent. 20 The RM formulation can be deposited onto the substrate by conventional coating or printing techniques which are known to the expert, including but not limited to spin coating, bar coating, slot die coating, inkjet printing, nozzle printing, screen printing, flexographic printing, offset printing, reel-to-reel printing, letter press printing, gravure printing, rotogravure printing, intaglio printing, pad printing, heat-seal 25 printing, or printing by means of a stamp or printing plate. Very preferred are printing methods, especially inkjet printing. Suitable substrate mediums and substrates are known to the expert and described in the literature, as for example conventional substrates used in the optical films 30 industry, such as glass or plastic. Especially suitable and preferred substrates for polymerization are polyester such as polyethyleneterephthalate (PET) or polyethylenenaphthalate (PEN), polyvinylalcohol (PVA), polycarbonate (PC), triacetylcellulose (TAC), cyclo-olefin polymers (COP), or commonly known color filter materials, preferably triacetylcellulose (TAC), cyclo-olefin polymers (COP), or 35 commonly known colour filter materials. In another preferred embodiment the substrate has a surface grating or surface pattern, preferably a diffraction grating, very preferably a PB grating. In another P24068 De - 134 - preferred embodiment the substrate is prepared from a photoalignment layer (PAL) which is patterned by laser interferometry to create a grating pattern with a defined 5 pitch. If the RMs do not align spontaneously on the chosen substrate into the desired orientation, an additional alignment layer capable of inducing the desired alignment can be used adjacent to the RM layer. For example, planar alignment can be 10 promoted by coating the substrate with a polyimide layer, and then rubbing the alignment layer with a velvet cloth. Other suitable planar alignment layers are known in the art, like for example rubbed polyimide or alignment layers prepared by photoalignment as described in US 15 5,602,661, US 5,389,698 or US 6,717,644. In general, reviews of alignment techniques are given for example by I. Sage in "Thermotropic Liquid Crystals", edited by G. W. Gray, John Wiley & Sons, 1987, pages 75-77; and by T. Uchida and H. Seki in "Liquid Crystals - Applications and 20 Uses Vol.3", edited by B. Bahadur, World Scientific Publishing, Singapore 1992, pages 1-63. A further review of alignment materials and techniques is given by J. Cognard, Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst.78, Supplement 1 (1981), pages 1-77. In a preferred embodiment, the process according to the invention contains a 25 process step where the RM mixture or RM formulation is allowed to rest for a period of time in order to evenly redistribute the polymerizable LC medium on the substrate (herein referred to as “annealing”). In a preferred embodiment, after providing the RM mixture or RM formulation onto 30 the substrate, the RM layer is annealed for a given period of time and at a given temperature. The annealing time is preferably between 10 seconds and 1 hour, preferably between 20 seconds and 10 minutes and most preferably between 30 seconds and 35 5 minutes. The annealing is preferably performed at a temperature from room temperature to 100°C, very preferably at room temperature. P24068 De - 135 - The RM mixture preferably consists of compounds that align spontaneously when 5 being deposited as a mixture onto the substrate. Therefore, preferably the RM mixture is not subjected to heat treatment to align the mesogenic or liquid-crystalline compounds before the UV exposure. If necessary, the layer can be cooled down to room temperature after annealing at 10 an elevated temperature. The cooling can be performed actively with the help of cooling aids or passively just by letting the layer stack rest for a given time. Photopolymerization of the RM layer (hereinafter also referred to as “curing”) is preferably achieved by exposing it to actinic radiation. Actinic radiation means 15 irradiation with light, like UV light, IR light or visible light, irradiation with X-rays or gamma rays, or irradiation with high-energy particles, such as ions or electrons. Preferably, polymerization is carried out by photo irradiation, in particular with UV light. As a source for actinic radiation, for example a single UV lamp or a set of UV lamps can be used. When using a high lamp power the curing time can be reduced. 20 Another possible source for photo radiation is a laser, like e.g. a UV laser, an IR laser, or a visible laser. The curing time is dependent, inter alia, on the reactivity of the RMs and other polymerizable components, the thickness of the RM layer, and the power and 25 selected wavelength of the UV lamp. By optimizing the curing time and the curing temperature it is also possible to improve the alignment quality of the polymer film. 30 The curing time is preferably ^ 5 minutes, very preferably ^ 3 minutes, more preferably ≤ 90 seconds, most preferably from 30 to 90 seconds. For mass production, curing times of ≤ 60 seconds or even ^ 30 seconds are preferred. The curing temperature is preferably from room temperature to 50°C, very 35 preferably from 35 to 45°C. For curing at 35°C or higher temperature the curing time is preferably at least 50 seconds, more preferably from 50 to 90 seconds. P24068 De - 136 - A suitable UV radiation power in the 1st UV step is preferably in the range from 5 to 300 mWcm-2, more preferably in the range from 50 to 250 mWcm-2 and most 5 preferably in the range from 100 to 180 mWcm-2. In connection with the applied UV radiation and as a function of time, a suitable UV dose is preferably in the range from 20 to 1000 mJcm-2, more preferably in the range from 30 to 800 mJcm-2, very preferably in the range from 40 to 500 mJcm-2, most 10 preferably in the range from 40 to 200 mJcm-2. In case of the two-step irradiation process according to the second preferred embodiment, the first irradiation step or 1st UV step for isomerizing the chiral compound is preferably performed in air. Preferably the first irradiation step or 1st UV 15 step is preferably performed at room temperature. A suitable UV radiation power for the photopolymerization is preferably in the range from 100 to 1000 mWcm-2, more preferably in the range from 200 to 800 mWcm-2 and most preferably in the range from 300 to 600 mWcm-2. 20 In connection with the applied UV radiation and as a function of time, a suitable UV dose is preferably in the range from 25 to 16500 mJcm-2, more preferably in the range from 50 to 7200 mJcm-2, very preferably in the range from 100 to 3500 mJcm- 2 and most preferably in the range from 200 to 2000 mJcm-2. 25 Photopolymerization (or the second irradiation step or 2nd UV step of the two-step process) is preferably performed under an inert gas atmosphere, preferably in a nitrogen atmosphere. Further preferably photopolymerization (or the second irradiation step or 2nd UV step in the two-step process) is preferably performed at 30 room temperature. The preferred thickness and retardation of a polymer film according to the present invention is determined by the optical properties desired from the film or the final product. 35 For optical applications of the polymer film, it preferably has a thickness of from 0.1 to 10 μm, very preferably from 0.1 to 2 μm, in particular from 0.1 to 1 μm. P24068 De - 137 - In a preferred embodiment, the polymer film according to the present invention shows planar alignment, i.e., the LC molecules are oriented parallel to the film plane 5 and the helical axis is oriented substantially perpendicular to the film plane. In another preferred embodiment the polymer film according to the present invention shows tilted alignment, i.e., the LC molecules are oriented at an angle to the film plane and the helical axis is oriented at an angle to the film plane, also referred as 10 tilt angle. In a tilted film, the tilt angle between the helix axis and the axis normal to the film plane is from 5° to 45°, very preferably from 15° to 45°. In another preferred embodiment, the tilt angle between the helix axis and the axis normal to the film plane is from 0 to 15°, very preferably from 0 to 5°. 15 Planar alignment can be induced for example by providing an alignment layer on the substrate, for example a polyimide alignment layer, as described above. Tilted alignment can be achieved for example by adding an alignment additive to the chiral RM mixture, or by using a substrate with a surface grating or pattern, e.g. a PB 20 grating. The optical retardation (^^^^) of a polymer film as a function of the wavelength of the incident beam (^) is given by the following equation (7): 25 ^^^^^^^^^^^n∙d)/^^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ (7)^ ^ wherein (^n) is the birefringence of the film, (d) is the thickness of the film and ^ is the wavelength of the incident beam. 30 The birefringence and accordingly optical retardation depends on the thickness of a film and the tilt angle of optical axis in the film (cf. Berek’s compensator). Therefore, the skilled expert is aware that different optical retardations or different birefringence can be induced by adjusting the orientation of the liquid-crystalline molecules in the polymer film. 35 The birefringence (^n) of the polymer film according to the present invention is preferably in the range from 0.1 to 0.8, more preferably from 0.2 to 0.7. P24068 De - 138 - After photopolymerization, the resulting polymer film can be removed from the substrate and combined with other substrates or optical films by a laminating 5 process known by the skilled person. Suitable substrates and optical films are given above and include especially polarisers, in particular linear polarisers, photoalignment layers, or diffraction gratings, for example PB gratings. The polymer film according to the present invention has good adhesion to plastic 10 substrates, in particular to TAC, COP, and colour filters. Accordingly, it can be used as adhesive or base coating for subsequent polymerized RM layers or LC layers which otherwise would not well adhere to the substrates. The polymer film of the present invention can also be used as alignment film or 15 substrate for other liquid-crystalline or RM materials. The inventors have found that the polymer film obtainable from a RM formulation as described above and below, is in particular useful for multilayer applications due to its improved dewetting characteristics. In this way, stacks of optical films or preferably polymerized LC films can be prepared. 20 A preferred embodiment of the present invention relates to a process of preparing an optical element, comprising the steps of: A1) providing a first layer of an RM formulation according to the invention onto a substrate, preferably a substrate which has a surface grating or pattern, preferably 25 by a printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing, A2) removing any solvents present, A3) optionally annealing the first RM layer (i.e., without solvents), preferably at a temperature where it is in the nematic or chiral nematic phase, A4) polymerising the RM layer, preferably by exposure to UV light, under an inert 30 atmosphere, B1) providing a second layer of an RM formulation according to the invention on to the first layer, , preferably by a printing method, very preferably by inkjet printing, B2) removing any solvents present, B3) optionally annealing the second RM layer (i.e., without solvents), preferably at a 35 temperature where it is in the nematic or chiral nematic phase, B4) polymerising the RM layer, preferably by exposure to UV light, under an inert atmosphere. P24068 De - 139 - A third, fourth or further layers can be prepared by repeating process steps B1) to B4) using the same or a different RM formulation. 5 The RM formulation of the first layer and the RM formulation of the second layer are preferably different from each other. In a preferred embodiment the RM formulations used for preparation of the first and second layer, respectively, contain different amounts of a chiral compound(s) and/or contain chiral compounds with different 10 HTP. As a consequence, the helical pitch of the first and second layer will be different from each other. Alternatively, an RM mixture or RM formulation containing a chiral dopant (chiral mixture) is blended with an RM mixture or RM formulation that does not contain a chiral compound (achiral mixture), which allows to easily vary the amount of the chiral dopant in the blend of the chiral and achiral mixture, and 15 thereby to easily adjust the helical pitch of the final layer and polymer film. First and second layers can then be prepared from such RM mixtures or blended RM mixtures. Very preferably the RM mixture or formulation of the second layer contains a higher amount of the same chiral compound than the RM mixture or formulation of the first layer, and/or the RM mixture or formulation of the second layer contains a 20 chiral compound with a higher HTP than the RM mixture or formulation of the first layer. Preferably the helical pitch in the first layer is longer than the helical pitch in the second layer. The RM formulations and methods of the present invention do thus allow a simple 25 way of preparing a multilayer of two or more chiral LC polymer films, by using an achiral RM host mixture comprising, or consisting of, one or more compounds selected from formulae D, M, A and T. This achiral RM host mixture can be used for the preparation of each individual layer. Chiral RM mixtures for use in the first, second or further layers, respectively, are prepared by adding different amounts of 30 the same chiral compound to the RM host mixture, or by adding chiral compounds with differing HTP to the RM host mixture. The invention further relates to an optical, electrooptical or electronic device or a component comprising an RM mixture or a polymer film as described above and 35 below. Preferred components include a PVH, diffraction grating, PBG or Bragg PG, lens, PB lens, optical waveguide, polarization beam splitter, quarter wave foil (QWF) or P24068 De - 140 - half wave foil (HWF), comprising a polymer film obtained from an RM formulation according to the present invention as described above and below. 5 The polymer film according to the present invention can be used in displays of the transmissive or reflective type. It can be used in conventional OLED displays or LCDs, in particular LCDs. 10 The present invention is described above and below with particular reference to the preferred embodiments. It should be understood that various changes and modifications might be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. 15 Many of the compounds or mixtures thereof mentioned above and below are commercially available. All of these compounds are either known or can be prepared by methods which are known per se, as described in the literature (for example in the standard works such as Houben-Weyl, Methoden der Organischen Chemie [Methods of Organic Chemistry], Georg-Thieme-Verlag, Stuttgart), to be 20 precise under reaction conditions which are known and suitable for said reactions. Use may also be made here of variants which are known per se, but are not mentioned here. It will be appreciated that variations to the foregoing embodiments of the invention 25 can be made while still falling within the scope of the invention. Alternative features serving the same, equivalent, or similar purpose may replace each feature disclosed in this specification, unless stated otherwise. Thus, unless stated otherwise, each feature disclosed is one example only of a generic series of equivalent or similar features. 30 All of the features disclosed in this specification may be combined in any combination, except combinations where at least some of such features and/or steps are mutually exclusive. In particular, the preferred features of the invention are applicable to all aspects of the invention and may be used in any combination. 35 Likewise, features described in non-essential combinations may be used separately (not in combination). P24068 De - 141 - It will be appreciated that many of the features described above, particularly of the preferred embodiments, are inventive in their own right and not just as part of an 5 embodiment of the present invention. Independent protection may be sought for these features in addition to or alternative to any invention presently claimed. Unless explicitly noted otherwise, all temperature values indicated in the present application, such as, for example, for the melting point T(K,N), the transition from the 10 smectic (S) to the nematic (N) phase T(S,N) and the clearing point T(N,I), are quoted in degrees Celsius (°C). Furthermore, K denotes the crystalline state, N denotes the nematic phase, and I denotes the isotropic phase. The data between these symbols represent the transition temperatures. 15 Unless explicitly noted otherwise, all physical properties have been and are determined according to "Merck Liquid Crystals, Physical Properties of Liquid Crystals", Status Nov.1997, Merck KGaA, Germany and are given for a temperature of 20 °C, unless explicitly stated otherwise. 20 Above and below, percentages are per cent by weight unless stated otherwise. All temperatures are given in degrees Celsius. All boiling points are given for atmospheric pressure. Above and below, m.p. denotes the melting point, TNI and cl.p. denote the nematic- 25 isotropic phase transition temperature (or clearing point), Tg denotes glass transition temperature. Furthermore, C denotes the crystalline state, N denotes the nematic phase, SA, SB etc. denotes the smectic A phase, smectic B phase etc., SX denotes an unidentified smectic phase, X denotes an unidentified mesophase and I denotes the isotropic phase. The values between these symbols represent the transition 30 temperature in °C. Unless stated otherwise, the onset temperature is given for TNI. ^ n denotes the optical anisotropy or birefringence (^n = ne - no, where no denotes the refractive index perpendicular to the longitudinal molecular axes and ne denotes the refractive index parallel thereto) at 589 nm and room temperature. The optical and electro optical data are measured at 20°C, unless expressly stated otherwise. 35 "Clearing point" and "clearing temperature" mean the temperature of the transition from an LC phase into the isotropic phase. P24068 De - 142 - Unless stated otherwise, the percentages of individual solid compounds in an RM mixture as described above and below refer to the total amount of solids in the 5 mixture, i.e., without any solvents. Unless stated otherwise, all optical, electro-optical properties and physical parameters like birefringence, permittivity, electrical conductivity, electrical resistivity and sheet resistance, refer to a temperature of 20°C. 10 The invention will now be described in more detail by reference to the following working examples, which are illustrative only and do not limit the scope of the invention. 15 Example 1 To test the solubility and inkjet printing performance, the RM mixture R1 is formulated as follows: 20 25 25 30 59 35 P24068 De - 143 - M10a 5 -1-6a 10 The RM mixture R1 is then dissolved in various organic solvents as shown in Table 1. The solubility of RM mixture R1 in the pure solvent is tested in concentration ranges from 5 to 30% by weight of solid content. The symbols indicate “o”- full 15 solubility, “-“cloudy solution, “x”-precipitation, and “xx” – not soluble. Table 1: Solubility as a function of time and solid % of R1 S 20 Ti h 1 2 24 25 48 o o o o o S Ti h 30 1 2 24 48 o x x xx xx 35 Similar tests are carried out for other solvents. The results are shown in Table 2. Therein, the “o” symbol indicates achieved solubility of at least 15 wt% of RM mixture R1, while the other symbols indicate “x”-precipitation, and “xx” – not soluble. P24068 De - 144 - The values of the boiling point of the respective pure solvents are also given in Table 2. 5 Table 2: Solubility in pure solvents with at least 15 % solid content of R1 for 48 h. Boiling point °C C 10 E M M p C M 15 T X P 3 B 20 From Tables 1 and 2 it can be seen that common organic solvents such as aromatic hydrocarbons and aromatic ethers do not dissolve the RM mixture R1 in the required concentration. While pure aliphatic ketones show high solubility of the tested RM mixture, they are not suitable for use in inkjet printing as a single solvent due to their low 25 boiling point (Tb<180°C). From Table 2 it can also be seen that aromatic esters and alkyl esters of dicarboxylic acids of formula S1 and S2 according to the present invention allow for more flexibility in the optimization of RM mixture solubility and boiling point. A longer aliphatic group on the 30 ester (radical RS1-3 in formula S1 and S2) allows for an increase in boiling point, however, it reduces the solubility. It can also be seen that the optimum length is methyl or ethyl. For example, there is an increase in boiling point from methyl benzoate to hexyl benzoate but the solubility will be reduced. 35 When choosing solvents for inkjet printing formulations, further processing conditions have to be considered. For example, inkjet printing formulations with higher boiling point solvents allow for more stability, however, when processing the RM-containing thin films, the solvents should be removed during annealing at 100 °C for up to 5 min, preferably P24068 De - 145 - up to 3 min at 80 °C. Therefore, for the inkjet printing tests, solvent mixtures containing cyclohexanone and the ester-type solvents of formula S1 and S2 are also used. 5 Table 3 shows a summary of the inkjet printing test using formulations of the RM mixture R1 dissolved at 15% by weight, either in pure cyclohexanone or pure 3- phenoxy toluene as comparison examples, or in a 27:73 solvent blend of cyclohexanone and the respective ester-type solvent according to the present 10 invention. Therein, the symbol “o” indicates good jetting stability and good recovery, the symbol “-” indicates no or bad jetting stability, and the symbol “x” indicates bad recovery. “Recovery”, also sometimes referred to as “latency”, herein means that the formulation is kept idle in the ink-jet point head for a certain period of time. A good recovery after >56 hours indicates that it is possible to recover jetting performance 15 by a few maintenance steps after the formulation was kept idle for 56 hours. Table 3: Inkjet printing results J 20 C E M M 25 B D 3- y 1) blend of cyclohexanone : listed solvent 27:73 From Table 3 it can be seen that the combinations including a solvent of formula S1 30 or S2 according to the present invention show both good jetting stability and good recovery, in contrast to the pure reference solvents cyclohexanone and 3-phenoxy toluene. For further investigation, jetting tests are carried out for formulations of RM mixture 35 R1 in the pure solvent cyclohexanone of prior art, and in blends of cyclohexanone with the solvent 3-PT of prior art, or with the solvent ethyl benzoate of formula S1 and S1-2 according to the present invention, at different ratios. The RM formulations P24068 De - 146 - are printed onto a substrate, the solvent(s) removed, and the RM layer cured to form a polymer film by the following process: 5 The films are printed with an LP50 PixDro printer onto a rubbed polyimide-coated glass substrate. Directly after printing the samples are placed onto 80°C hotplate for one minute, after that the samples are cured in nitrogen atmosphere at 40 °C with a UV-LED lamp with total dose of 4.9 J/cm². 10 The alignment quality of the RM layer is then investigated by microscopy. Fig.1a (x2 magnification) shows the stitched microscopic image of a polymer film prepared from the inkjet printed RM formulation R1 in pure cyclohexanone between 15 crossed polarizers (reference example). Fig. 1b (x2 magnification) shows the stitched microscopic image of a polymer film prepared from the inkjet printed RM formulation R1 in the solvent blend cyclohexanone:3-PT 75:25 between crossed polarizers (reference example). 20 Fig.1c (x2 magnification) shows the stitched microscopic image of a polymer film prepared from the inkjet printed RM formulation R1 in the solvent blend cyclohexanone:ethyl benzoate 73:27 between crossed polarizers according to the present invention. 25 From Fig. 1a-c the difference can be seen between the alignment quality of polymer films obtained from the RM formulations in a solvent or sovent blend according to prior art and obtained from the RM formulation in the solvent blend according to the invention. 30 Thus, using the solvent cyclohexanone of prior art with a boiling point of Tb<180°C leads to fast solvent evaporation and very pronounced, visible line defects as can be seen in Fig.1a. 35 When using cyclohexanone in a blend with the high boiling point solvent 3-PT of prior art, which has a low solubility of the RM material, very pronounced defects such as crystals and particles due to material precipitation appear during processing, as can be seen in Fig.1b. P24068 De - 147 - In contrast, using cyclohexanone in a blend with the high boiling point solvent ethyl 5 benzoate (formula S1 and S1-2) according to the present invention leads to both good solubility and optimized solvent evaporation, and allows for the preparation of a homogeneous thin polymer film without visible defects, as can be seen in Fig. 1c. Example 2 10 To test the overall film-making process using the solvent system according to the present invention, RM mixtures R2A and R2B are formulated as follows: 15 20 25 o a 30 A1 35 P24068 De - 148 - A17 5 Each of the mixtures R2A and R2B is dissolved in a blend of ethyl benzoate:cyclohexanone (2:1) according to the present invention at 10% wt of solid, 10 to form formulations FR2A and FR2B, respectively. Two-layer film stacks are then prepared from mixtures R2A and R2B on a 400nm grating pitch patterned substrate prepared from the photoalignment material SD1 (commercially available from Sigma (Merck) using the method as described below. 15 1 20 Patterned Alignment Layer SD1 - SD1 is spin-coated on Corning Eagle XG glass at 2000rpm for 30s under a blanket of N2, 25 - the spin-coated SD1 layer is then annealed on a hotplate at 80C for 60s, - the annealed SD1 layer is then irradiated by a 400nm grating pattern using 405nm laser two-beam interference method. RM Layer 1 coating step 30 - Layer 1 formulation FR2A is spin-coated on the patterned SD1 layer at 2500rpm for 30s, - the spin-coated RM layer is then annealed at various temperatures and times, - the annealed RM layer is then cured using high-pressure mercury vapor lamp, 100mW cm-2 for various times at various temperatures. 35 RM Layer 2 coating step - Layer 2 formulation FR2B is spin coated directly on the cured RM Layer 1 at 900rpm for 30s, P24068 De - 149 - - the spin-coated RM layer is then annealed at various temperatures and times, - the annealed RM layer is then cured using high pressure mercury vapor lamp, 5 100mW cm-2 for various times at various temperatures. The alignment quality of each RM layer is checked via microscopy. Good alignment is defined in that there are no defects present when checked via microscopy and that the film looks clear without haze by eye. If defects are present, then the 10 alignment quality is defined to be bad. Fig. 2 (x100 magnification) shows a microscopic image of a polymer film prepared from the coated mixture R2A or R2B between crossed polarizers with good alignment. 15 The alignment quality of RM Layer 1 and RM Layer 2 are shown in Table 4 (the symbol “o” indicating good alignment). Table 4: Alignmert Quality of RM Layers 1 and 2 20 S 25 30 From Table 4, it can be seen that good alignment can be achieved for various curing times and temperatures and annealing times and temperatures. 35

Claims

P24068 De - 150 - Patent Claims 5 1. A formulation comprising a reactive mesogen (RM) or an RM mixture of two or more RMs further comprising a solvent or a solvent blend of two or more solvents, wherein the formulation comprises at least one first solvent selected from formulae S1 and S2: 10 ArS1-(CH2)a-ZS1-RS1 S1 RS2-ZS2-XS-ZS3-RS3 S2 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each 15 occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings ArS1 aryl or heteroaryl with 5 or 6 ring atoms, which optionally contains one or two hetero atoms selected from N, O and S, preferably phenyl, and which is optionally substituted by one or more groups LS, 20 ZS1-3 -CO-O- or -O-CO-, XS ArS2 or (CH2)b, 25 ArS2 arylene or heteroarylene with 5 or 6 ring atoms, which optionally contains one or two hetero atoms selected from N, O and S, preferably 1,2-phenylene, 1,3-phenylene or 1,4-phenylene, and which is optionally substituted by one or more groups LS, 30 LS F, Cl, or optionally halogenated alkyl, alkoxy, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 5 C atoms, preferably alkyl with 1 to 5 C-atoms, RS1-S3 alkyl with 1 to 8, preferably 1 to 6, C atoms, very preferably methyl, 35 ethyl, propyl or butyl, most preferably methyl or ethyl, a 0 or 1, P24068 De - 151 - b 3, 4, 5 or 6, preferably 4. 5 2. The formulation according to Claim 1, characterized in that the first solvent is selected from the following subformulae: 1 10 2 15 3 20 4 25 1 30 2 35 3 P24068 De - 152 - 5 4 10 5 15 6 20 7 wherein RS1, RS2, RS3 and b have the meanings given in Claim 1, RS1 is preferably methyl or ethyl, RS2 and RS3 are preferably methyl or ethyl, and b is 25 preferably 4 3. The formulation according to Claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the first solvent is selected from methyl benzoate, ethyl benzoate, methyl phenylacetate, butyl benzoate, benzyl propionate, phenyl proprionate, 30 dimethyl phthalate and diethyl adipate, most preferably from methyl benzoate and ethyl benzoate. 4. The formulation according to one or more of Claims 1 to 3, characterized in that it comprises at least one second solvent which is different from the first 35 solvent, and is preferably selected from selected from ketones, preferably acetone, methyl ethyl ketone (MEK), methyl propyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone (MIBK), cyclopentanone or cyclohexanone; acetates, preferably methyl, ethyl or butyl acetate or methyl acetoacetate; alcohols, preferably P24068 De - 153 - methanol, ethanol or isopropyl alcohol; alicyclic hydrocarbons, preferably cyclopentane or cyclohexane; halogenated hydrocarbons, preferably di- or 5 trichloromethane; glycols or their esters, preferably PGME (propylene glycol 1- methyl ether), PGMEA (propyl glycol monomethyl ether acetate) or DPMAc (di(propylene glycol) methyl ether acetate), ^-butyrolactone, menthyl isovalerate, or binary, ternary or higher mixtures of the aforementioned solvents. 10 5. The formulation according to one or more of Claims 1 to 4, characterized in that the first solvent or the solvent blend has a boiling point ≥180°C, very preferably from 190°C to 300°C, most preferably from 195°C to 260°C. 15 6. The formulation according to one or more of Claims 1 to 5, characterized in that first solvent or the solvent blend has the following Hansen Solubility Parameters (in MPa0.5): ^D from 15 to 20, preferably from 17 to 18.5, very preferably from 17.5 to 19, 20 ^P from 5 to 12, preferably from 5.5 to 11, very preferably from 6.5 to 10.5, ^H from 4 to 8, preferably from 4.5 to 7, very preferably from 5 to 6.5. 7. The formulation according to one or more of Claims 1 to 6, characterized in that it comprises one or more RMs selected from formulae D and M 25 P1-Sp1-MG-Sp2-P2 D P1-Sp1-MG-R22 M 30 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings P1, P2 a polymerizable group, 35 Sp1, Sp2 a spacer group or a single bond, MG a rod-shaped mesogenic group, which is preferably selected of formula MG P24068 De - 154 - -(A1-Z1)n-A2- MG 5 A1 and A2 an aromatic or alicyclic group, which optionally contains one or more heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, and is optionally mono- or polysubstituted by L, 10 L P-Sp-, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO2 , -NCO, -NCS, -OCN, -SCN, - C(=O)NRxRy, -C(=O)ORx, -C(=O)Rx, -NRxRy, -OH, -SF5, optionally substituted silyl, aryl or heteroaryl with 1 to 12, preferably 1 to 6 C atoms, and straight chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 15 12, preferably 1 to 6 C atoms, wherein one or more H atoms are optionally replaced by F or Cl, Rx and Ry H or alkyl with 1 to 12 C-atoms, 20 Z1 -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-CO-, -CO-S-, -O-COO-, -CO- NR00-, -NR00-CO-, -NR00-CO-NR000, -NR00-CO-O-, -O-CO-NR00-, - OCH2-, -CH2O-, -SCH2-, -CH2S-, -CF2O-, -OCF2-, -CF2S-, -SCF2-, - CH2CH2-, -(CH2)n1, -CF2CH2-, -CH2CF2-, -CF2CF2-, -CH=N-, - N=CH-, -N=N-, -CH=CR00-, -CY1=CY2-, -C^C-, -CH=CH-COO-, - 25 OCO-CH=CH- or a single bond, preferably -COO-, -OCO- or a single bond, R00, R000 H or alkyl having 1 to 12 C atoms, 30 Y1 and Y2 H, F, Cl or CN, R22 P-Sp-, F, Cl, Br, I, -CN, -NO2 , -NCO, -NCS, -OCN, -SCN, - C(=O)NRxRy, -C(=O)X, -C(=O)ORx, -C(=O)Ry, -NRxRy, -OH, -SF5, optionally substituted silyl, straight chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy, 35 alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 12, preferably 1 to 6 C atoms, wherein one or more H atoms are optionally replaced by F or Cl, P24068 De - 155 - X halogen, preferably F or Cl, 5 n 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 1 or 2, most preferably 2, n1 an integer from 1 to 10, preferably 1, 2, 3 or 4. 8. The formulation according to one or more of Claims 1 to 7, characterized in 10 that it comprises one or more RMs selected from formulae T and A T 15 A 20 wherein the individual radicals, independently of each other and on each occurrence identically or differently, have the following meanings P a polymerizable group, 25 Sp a spacer group or a single bond, Sp1 a spacer group or a single bond, preferably alkylene with 1 to 12, more preferably with 3 to 6, C atoms, 30 R11 H, F, Cl, CN, alkyl, alkoxy, thioalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 15, preferably with 1 to 5, C atoms which is optionally optionally fluorinated, or P-Sp, R33 H, F, Cl, CN, CH=CH2, alkyl, alkoxy, thioalkyl, alkylcarbonyl, 35 alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy or alkoxycarbonyloxy with 1 to 6, preferably with 1 to 3, C atoms which is optionally fluorinated or chlorinated, or P-Sp, P24068 De - 156 - A, B, D, and E are selected from the group consisting of 1,4-phenylene, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl, 5 anthracene-9,10-diyl, fluorene-2,7-diyl, dibenzothiophene-2,7-diyl, dibenzofuran-2,7-diyl, benzo[1,2-b:4,5-b']dithiophene-2,5-diyl, indole- 4,7-diyl, benzothiophene-4,7-diyl, 9,10-dihydro-phenanthrene-2,7-diyl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-5,8-diyl or indane-2,5-diyl, where, in addition, one or more CH groups in these groups may be replaced by 10 N, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp-, C is selected from the group consisting of benzene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, anthracene-9,10-diyl, fluorene-2,7-diyl, 15 dibenzofuran-2,7-diyl, dibenzothiophene-2,7-diyl, benzo[1,2-b:4,5- b']dithiophene-2,5-diyl, indole-4,7-diyl, benzothiophene-4,7-diyl, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp, and one of rings C and D may also denote a single bond, 20 AA, BA phenylene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, fluorene-2,7-diyl, dibenzothiophene-2,7-diyl, dibenzofuran-2,7-diyl, benzo[1,2-b:4,5-b']dithiophene-2,5-diyl, indole-4,7-diyl, benzothiophene-4,7-diyl, 9,10-dihydro-phenanthrene-2,7-diyl or 25 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-5,8-diyl where, in addition, one or more CH groups in these groups may be replaced by N, all of which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P-Sp-. CA phenylene-1,4-diyl, naphthalene-1,4-diyl, or naphthalene-2,6-diyl, 30 preferably phenylene-1,4-diyl or naphthalene-2,6-diyl, in which, in addition, one or more CH groups in these groups may be replaced by N, and which are optionally substituted by one or more groups L or P- Sp-, 35 wherein preferably not more than one of AA, BA and CA denote naphthalene-1,4-diyl, P24068 De - 157 - L F, Cl, -CN, -SCN, P-Sp-, or straight chain, branched or cyclic alkyl having 1 to 25 C atoms, wherein one or more non-adjacent CH2- 5 groups are optionally replaced by -O-, -S-, -CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O- CO-O-, CR0=CR00-, -C^C-, , 10 in such a manner that O- and/or S-atoms are not directly connected with each other, and wherein one or more H atoms are each optionally replaced by P-Sp-, F or Cl, or two substituents L that are connected to directly adjacent C atoms may also form a cycloalkyl or 15 cycloalkenyl group with 5, 6, 7 or 8 C atoms, Z1 0-, 20 -CH=CH-COO-, -OCO-CH=CH- or a single bond, preferably -COO-, -OCO-, -C^C-, or a single bond, most preferably a single bond, 25 R0, R00 H or alkyl having 1 to 12 C atoms, Y1, Y2 H, F, Cl, NCS, or CN, 30 m1, m2 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, very preferably 0 or 1, most preferably 0, m3 0 or 1, 35 n1 1, 2, 3 or 4, s 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0, 1 or 2. P24068 De - 158 - 9. The formulation according to one or more of Claims 1 to 8, characterized in that it further comprises one or more chiral compounds which are optionally 5 polymerizable and/or isomerizable. 10. The formulation according to one or more of Claims 1 to 9, characterized in that it further comprises one or more additives, preferably selected from the group consisting of polymerization initiators, surfactants, stabilisers, catalysts, 10 sensitizers, inhibitors, chain-transfer agents, co-reacting monomers, reactive thinners, surface-active compounds, lubricating agents, wetting agents, dispersing agents, hydrophobing agents, adhesive agents, flow improvers, degassing or defoaming agents, deaerators, diluents, reactive diluents, auxiliaries, colourants, dyes, pigments and nanoparticles. 15 11. The formulation according to one or more of Claims 1 to 10, characterized in that it does not contain a compound with at least one CF3 or CF2 group (PFAS), and preferably does not contain a compound with a polyfluorinated alkyl or aryl group or a perfluorocarbon group. 20 12. A polymer or polymer film obtainable or obtained from a formulation according to one or more of Claims 1 to 11. 13. A process of preparing a polymer or polymer film according to Claim 12, 25 comprising the steps of depositing a layer of the formulation according to one or more of Claims 1 to 11 onto a substrate, preferably removing the solvents, optionally annealing the layer, and polymerizing the RM or RM mixture, preferably at a temperature where it exhibits a liquid crystal phase, and wherein the formulation is preferably deposited onto the substrate by a printing 30 method, very preferably by inkjet printing. 14. Use of the formulation, polymer or polymer film according to one or more of Claims 1 to 12 in optical, electrooptical or electronic components or devices. 35 15. An optical, electrooptical or electronic device or a component thereof, comprising a formulation, polymer or polymer film according to one or more of Claims 1 to 12. P24068 De - 159 - 16. The component of Claim 15, which is selected from optical retardation films like quarter wave foils (QWF) or half wave foils (HWF), polarizers, optical 5 compensators, reflective films, diffraction or surface gratings, Bragg polarization gratings (Bragg PG), polarization volume gratings (PVG), polarization volume holograms (PVH), Pancharatnam Berry (PB) gratings, furthermore nonmechanical beam steering elements, optical waveguides, optical couplers or combiners, polarization beam splitters, partial mirrors, 10 reflective films, alignment layers, colour filters, antistatic protection sheets, electromagnetic interference protection sheets, lenses for light guides, focusing and optical effects, polarization controlled lenses, PB lenses and IR reflection films. 15 17. The device of Claim 15, which is selected from liquid crystal displays, organic light emitting diodes, autostereoscopic 3D displays, see-through near-eye displays, AR/VR systems, goggles for AR/VR applications, switchable windows, spatial light modulators, optical data storage devices, optical sensors, holographic devices, spectrometers, optical telecommunication 20 systems, polarimeters or front-/backlights. 25 30 35
PCT/EP2025/059440 2024-04-11 2025-04-07 Polymerizable liquid crystal formulations Pending WO2025214945A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP24169621 2024-04-11
EP24169621.0 2024-04-11

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025214945A1 true WO2025214945A1 (en) 2025-10-16

Family

ID=90721295

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2025/059440 Pending WO2025214945A1 (en) 2024-04-11 2025-04-07 Polymerizable liquid crystal formulations

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025214945A1 (en)

Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5389698A (en) 1991-07-26 1995-02-14 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Process for making photopolymers having varying molecular orientation using light to orient and polymerize
US5602661A (en) 1993-02-17 1997-02-11 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Optical component
WO1998000428A1 (en) 1996-07-01 1998-01-08 Merck Patent Gmbh Chiral dopants
GB2314839A (en) 1996-07-01 1998-01-14 Merck Patent Gmbh Chiral reactive mesogens
GB2328207A (en) 1997-08-13 1999-02-17 Merck Patent Gmbh Chiral hydrobenzoin derivatives for use as dopants in liquid crystalline mixtures
WO2002040614A1 (en) 2000-11-20 2002-05-23 Merck Patent Gmbh Chiral photoisomerizable compounds
EP1389199A1 (en) 2001-05-21 2004-02-18 MERCK PATENT GmbH Chiral compounds
US6717644B2 (en) 1993-02-17 2004-04-06 Rolic Ag Optical component and method of manufacture
WO2022033908A1 (en) 2020-08-11 2022-02-17 Cup&Cino Kaffeesystem-Vertrieb Gmbh & Co. Kg Mechanical brewing unit
US20220056340A1 (en) * 2018-12-12 2022-02-24 Merck Patent Gmbh Polymerizable liquid crystal ink formulations

Patent Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5389698A (en) 1991-07-26 1995-02-14 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Process for making photopolymers having varying molecular orientation using light to orient and polymerize
US5602661A (en) 1993-02-17 1997-02-11 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Optical component
US6717644B2 (en) 1993-02-17 2004-04-06 Rolic Ag Optical component and method of manufacture
WO1998000428A1 (en) 1996-07-01 1998-01-08 Merck Patent Gmbh Chiral dopants
GB2314839A (en) 1996-07-01 1998-01-14 Merck Patent Gmbh Chiral reactive mesogens
GB2328207A (en) 1997-08-13 1999-02-17 Merck Patent Gmbh Chiral hydrobenzoin derivatives for use as dopants in liquid crystalline mixtures
WO2002040614A1 (en) 2000-11-20 2002-05-23 Merck Patent Gmbh Chiral photoisomerizable compounds
EP1389199A1 (en) 2001-05-21 2004-02-18 MERCK PATENT GmbH Chiral compounds
US20220056340A1 (en) * 2018-12-12 2022-02-24 Merck Patent Gmbh Polymerizable liquid crystal ink formulations
WO2022033908A1 (en) 2020-08-11 2022-02-17 Cup&Cino Kaffeesystem-Vertrieb Gmbh & Co. Kg Mechanical brewing unit

Non-Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
C. M. HANSEN: "Hansen Solubility Parameters: A User's Handbook", 2007, TAYLOR AND FRANCIS GROUP, LLC
C. TSCHIERSKEG. PELZLS. DIELE, ANGEW. CHEM., vol. 116, 2004, pages 6340 - 6368
I. SAGE: "Thermotropic Liquid Crystals", 1987, JOHN WILEY & SONS, pages: 75 - 77
J. COGNARD, MOL. CRYST. LIQ. CRYST., vol. 78, 1981, pages 1 - 77
JAP. J. APPL. PHYS., vol. 42, 2003, pages 3463
N. SINGH, SPECTROSCOPIC ELLIPSOMETRY, PART1-THEORY AND FUNDAMENTALS, PART 2 - PRACTICAL EXAMPLES AND PART 3 - MEASUREMENTS, October 2006 (2006-10-01)
PURE APPL. CHEM., vol. 73, no. 5, 2001, pages 888
T. UCHIDAH. SEKI: "Liquid Crystals - Applications and Uses", vol. 3, 1992, WORLD SCIENTIFIC PUBLISHING, pages: 1 - 63

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102864859B1 (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal materials and polymerized liquid crystal films
EP4217442B1 (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal material and polymerized liquid crystal film
WO2022233908A1 (en) Reactive mesogens
KR102720800B1 (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal medium and polymer film having flat optical dispersion
JP2020500981A (en) Polymerizable LC media and polymer film with flat optical dispersion
WO2019034590A1 (en) Polymerisable liquid crystal material and polymerised liquid crystal film
TW202231713A (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal material and polymerized liquid crystal film
KR102494750B1 (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal substances and polymerized liquid crystal films
WO2023237572A1 (en) Polymerisable liquid crystal medium and polymerised liquid crystal film
WO2025214945A1 (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal formulations
WO2025252654A1 (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal composition
WO2024235946A1 (en) Optical element comprising a chiral lc polymer film
WO2024235947A1 (en) Chiral reactive mesogen mixture
EP4689002A1 (en) Reactive mesogens with high birefringence
WO2024200529A1 (en) Chiral reactive mesogen mixture
WO2024260930A1 (en) Half-wave plate
KR20260010403A (en) Chiral-reactive mesogen mixtures
WO2025114344A1 (en) Process of preparing a polymer film from a homeotropically aligned reactive mesogen mixture
KR20260010402A (en) Optical device comprising a chiral LC polymer film
WO2024052363A1 (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal material and polymerized liquid crystal film
EP4590786A1 (en) Polymerisable liquid crystal medium and polymerised liquid crystal film
EP4577615A1 (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal material and polymerized liquid crystal film

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 25717262

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1